Toyota 2003 4Runner Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2003-4Runner-Owners-Manual-762995 toyota-2003-4runner-owners-manual-762995 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 408 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Foreword
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2
3
4
5
6
71
72
73
8
9
Owners Warranty Information
impin
impman
repair
seat

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

241

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR

TOYOTA

Information before driving your Toyota

Off–road vehicle precautions 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Break–in period 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel pump shut off system 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation in foreign countries 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three–way catalytic converters 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine exhaust cautions 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facts about engine oil consumption 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Iridium–tipped spark plugs 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake system 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake pad wear limit indicators 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage stowage precautions 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Limited–slip differential 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your Toyota’s identification 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft prevention labels 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suspension and chassis 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of tires 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

242

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This vehicle belongs to the utility ve-

hicle class, which has higher ground

clearance and narrower tread in relation

to the height of its center of gravity to

make it capable of performing in a wide

variety of off–road applications. Specific

design characteristics give it a higher

center of gravity than ordinary passen-

ger cars. This vehicle design feature

causes this type of vehicle to be more

likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles

have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. An advan-

tage of the higher ground clearance is

a better view of the road allowing you

to anticipate problems. It is not de-

signed for cornering at the same

speeds as ordinary passenger cars any

more than low–slung sports cars de-

signed to perform satisfactorily under

off–road conditions. Therefore, sharp

turns at excessive speeds may cause

rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers, if at all possible. Failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or vehicle

rollover causing death or serious

injury.

Loading cargo on the roof luggage

carrier will make the center of the

vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high

speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,

sudden braking or abrupt maneu-

vers, otherwise it may result in loss

of control or vehicle rollover due to

failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly.

Off–road vehicle precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

243

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Always slow down in gusty cross-

winds. Because of its profile and

higher center of gravity, your ve-

hicle is more sensitive to side

winds than an ordinary passenger

car. Slowing down will allow you to

have better control.

When driving off–road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

Do not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up or

straight down is preferred. Your ve-

hicle (or any similar off–road ve-

hicle) can tip over sideways much

more easily than forward or back-

ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

break–in. But following a few simple tips

for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add

to the future economy and long life of

your vehicle:

Avoid full throttle acceleration when

starting and driving.

Avoid racing the engine.

Try to avoid hard stops during the first

300 km (200 miles).

Do not drive for a long time at any

single speed, either fast or slow.

Do not tow a trailer during the first 800

km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-

leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix–ups, your

Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.

The special nozzle on pumps with un-

leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-

dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will

not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use

should meet the specifications of ASTM

D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5–M93

in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of

leaded gasoline will cause the three–

way catalytic converter to lose its ef-

fectiveness and the emission control

system to function improperly. Also,

this can increase maintenance costs.

Break–in period Fuel

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

244

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research

Octane Number 91) or higher. For

improved vehicle performance, the use

of premium unleaded gasoline with an

Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane

Number 96) or higher is recommended.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating or research octane number lower

than stated above will cause persistent

heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will

lead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when

using the recommended fuel, or if you

hear steady knocking while holding a

steady speed on level roads, consult your

Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice

light knocking for a short time while accel-

erating or driving up hills. This is normal

and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT

ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline

that contains detergent additives to

avoid build–up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.

contains detergent additives to keep clean

and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,

Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for quality fuel named

World–Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that

is expected to be applied world wide.

The WWFC consists of three categories

that depend on required emission lev-

els. In the U.S., category 3 has been

adopted. The WWFC improves air quali-

ty by providing for better emissions in

vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction

through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-

formulated gasoline that contains oxy-

genates such as ethanol or MTBE is

available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner

burning gasoline and appropriately blended

reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-

oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-

mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-

prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate

blended gasoline where the oxygenate

content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%

MTBE. If you use gasohol in your

Toyota, be sure that it has an octane

rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-

taining MMT is used, your emission con-

trol system may be adversely affected.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-

strument cluster may come on. If this hap-

pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-

vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience

driveability problems caused by the partic-

ular gasoline that you are using. If you

continue to have unacceptable driveability,

try changing gasoline brands. If this does

not rectify your problem, then consult your

Toyota dealer.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

245

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE



Do not use gasohol other than

stated above. It will cause fuel sys-

tem damage or vehicle performance

problems.



If driveability problems occur (poor

hot starting, vaporizing, engine

knock, etc.), discontinue the use.



Take care not to spill gasohol dur-

ing refueling. Gasohol may cause

paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine to minimize the

risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls

or an airbag inflates upon collision. To

restart the engine after the fuel pump shut

off system activates, turn the ignition

switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start

it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle

before restarting the engine. If you

find that liquid has leaked onto the

ground, it is the fuel system has

been damaged and it is in need of

repair. In this case, do not restart the

engine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in

another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration

laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-

rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane

number).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

246

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1GR–FE engine

2UZ–FE engine

The three–way catalytic converter is an

emission control device installed in the

exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the

exhaust gas.

CAUTION

Keep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe

while the engine is running. The

exhaust gas is very hot.

Do not idle or park your vehicle

over anything that might burn easi-

ly such as grass, leaves, paper or

rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases

flowing into the three–way catalytic

converter may cause it to overheat

and create a fire hazard. To prevent

this and other damage, observe the

following precautions:



Use only unleaded gasoline.



Do not drive with an extremely low

fuel level; running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, creat-

ing an excessive load on the three–

way catalytic converter.



Do not allow the engine to run at

idle speed for more than 20 min-

utes.



Avoid racing the engine.



Do not push–start or pull–start your

vehicle.



Do not turn off the ignition while

the vehicle is moving.

Three–way catalytic converters

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

247

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)



Keep your engine in good running

order. Malfunctions in the engine

electrical system, electronic ignition

system/distributor ignition system

or fuel systems could cause an ex-

tremely high three–way catalytic

converter temperature.



If the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, take your

vehicle in for a check–up as soon

as possible. Remember, your Toyota

dealer knows your vehicle and its

three–way catalytic converter sys-

tem best.



To ensure that the three–way cata-

lytic converter and the entire emis-

sion control system operate proper-

ly, your vehicle must receive the

periodic inspections required by the

Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For

scheduled maintenance information,

refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment”.

CAUTION

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.

It contains carbon monoxide, which

is a colorless and odorless gas. It

can cause unconsciousness or even

death.

Make sure the exhaust system has

no holes or loose connections. The

system should be checked from

time to time. If you hit something,

or notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust, have the system

checked immediately.

Do not run the engine in a garage

or enclosed area except for the

time needed to drive the vehicle in

or out. The exhaust gases cannot

escape, making this a particularly

dangerous situation.

Do not remain for a long time in a

parked vehicle with the engine run-

ning. If it is unavoidable, however,

do so only in an unconfined area

and adjust the heating or cooling

system to force outside air into the

vehicle.

Keep the back door and back win-

dow closed while driving. An open

or unsealed back door and back

window, may cause exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle.

To allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep

the inlet grilles in front of the wind-

shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-

er obstructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes in the

vehicle, drive with the windows

open and the back door and back

window closed. Have the cause im-

mediately located and corrected.

Engine exhaust cautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

248

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of

lubricating and cooling the inside of the

engine, and plays a major role in main-

taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-

sume some engine oil during normal

engine operation. The causes of oil

consumption in a normal engine are as

follows.

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil

is left on the cylinder wall when a pis-

ton moves downwards in the cylinder.

High negative pressure generated when

the vehicle is decelerating sucks some

of this oil into the combustion chamber.

This oil as well as some part of the oil

film left on the cylinder wall is burned

by the high temperature combustion

gases during the combustion process.

Oil is also used to lubricate the stems

of the intake valves. Some of this oil

is sucked into the combustion chamber

together with the intake air and is

burned along with the fuel. High tem-

perature exhaust gases also burn the

oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve

stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-

pends on the viscosity of the oil, the

quality of the oil and the conditions the

vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high–speed driv-

ing and frequent acceleration and decel-

eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since

its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls

have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000

km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600

miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-

sumption, note that the oil may become

diluted and make it difficult to judge

the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for

repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-

mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not

show any drop in the oil level at all, even

after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This

is because the oil is gradually becoming

diluted with fuel or moisture, making it

appear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out

when the vehicle is then driven at high

speeds, as on an expressway, making it

appear that oil is excessively consumed

after driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL

CHECK

One of the most important points in prop-

er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-

gine oil at the optimum level so that oil

function will not be impaired. Therefore, it

is essential that the oil level be checked

regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil

level be checked every time you refuel

the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly

could lead to serious engine trouble

due to insufficient oil.

Facts about engine oil

consumption

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

249

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

For detailed information on oil level check,

see “Checking the engine oil level” on

page 324 in Section 7–2.

Your engine is fitted with iridium–tipped

spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium–tipped spark plugs

and do not adjust gaps for your en-

gine performance and smooth drive-

ability.

This brake system has 2 independent hy-

draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,

the other will still work. However, the ped-

al will be harder to press, and your stop-

ping distance will increase. Also, the

brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses brake fluid pres-

surized by the pump to power–assist the

brakes. If the brake booster fails during

driving, the brake system warning light

comes on and buzzer sounds continuous-

ly. In this case, the brakes may not work

properly. If they do not work well, depress

the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system

warning light comes on, immediately stop

your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-

er.

It is not a malfunction that the brake sys-

tem warning light may stay on for 60 sec-

onds after the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position.

Iridium–tipped spark plugs

(2UZ–FE engine) Brake system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

250

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the brake system warning

light and buzzer. It is normal if the light

turns off and the buzzer stops sounding

after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine

compartment after the engine is started or

the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.

This is a pump pulsating sound of the

brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not pump the brake pedal if the

engine stalls. Each push on the

pedal uses up your brake fluid

pressure reserve.

Even if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still

work. But you will have to push the

pedal hard, much harder than nor-

mal. And your braking distance will

increase.

ANTI–LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(with “ABS” warning light)

The anti–lock brake system is designed

to help prevent lock–up of the wheels

during a sudden braking or braking on

slippery road surfaces. This assists in

providing directional stability and steer-

ing performance of the vehicle under

these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake

pedal: When the anti–lock brake system

function is in action, you may feel the

brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.

In this situation, to let the anti–lock

brake system work for you, just hold the

brake pedal down more firmly. Do not

pump the brake in a panic stop. This

will result in reduced braking performan-

ce.

The anti–lock brake system becomes op-

erative after the vehicle has accelerated

to a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-

er, a steel plate at a construction site,

joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day

tends to activate the anti–lock brake sys-

tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound in

the engine compartment for a few seconds

when the engine is started or just after

the vehicle begins to move. This means

that the anti–lock brake system is in the

self–check mode, and does not indicate a

malfunction.

When the anti–lock brake system is ac-

tivated, the following conditions may

occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-

tion of the system:

You may hear the anti–lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal

pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-

hicle body and steering wheel. You

may also hear the motor sound in the

engine compartment even after the ve-

hicle is stopped.

At the end of the anti–lock brake sys-

tem activation, the brake pedal may

move a little forward.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

251

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti–lock

brake system: Although the anti–lock

brake system assists in providing ve-

hicle control, it is still important to

drive with all due care and maintain

a moderate speed and safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you, be-

cause there are limits to the vehicle

stability and effectiveness of steering

wheel operation even with the anti–

lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its

capability, or if hydroplaning occurs

during high speed driving in the rain,

the anti–lock brake system does not

provide vehicle control.

Anti–lock brake system is not de-

signed to shorten the stopping dis-

tance: Always drive at a moderate

speed and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Compared with vehicles without an

anti–lock brake system, your vehicle

may require a longer stopping dis-

tance in the following cases:

Driving on rough, gravel or snow–

covered roads.

Driving with tire chains installed.

Driving over the steps such as the

joints on the road.

Driving on roads where the road

surface is pitted or has other differ-

ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at

appropriate pressure: The anti–lock

brake system detects vehicle speeds

using the speed sensors for respec-

tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use

of tires other than specified may fail

to detect the accurate turning speed

resulting in a longer stopping dis-

tance.

Type A

Type B

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

252

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–

lock brake system and the brake assist

system work properly, the light turns off

after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either

of the systems malfunctions, the light

comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

Anti–lock brake system

Traction control system

(two–wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Hill–start assist control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti–lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels will lock up during a

sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

“VSC TRAC” warning light may come on

with the “ABS” warning light (brake assist

system warning light) when there is a mal-

function somewhere in the anti–lock brake

system (brake assist system).

If either of the following conditions oc-

curs, this indicates a malfunction some-

where in the components monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are dri-

ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti–lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may

occur, but do not indicate a malfunc-

tion:

The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

turns off after a few seconds.

DRUM–IN–DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE

SYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum–in–disc type

parking brake system. This type of brake

system needs bedding–down of the brake

shoes periodically or whenever the parking

brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

253

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-

ding–down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, the

brake assist system judges as an emer-

gency stop and provides more powerful

braking for a driver who cannot hold

down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-

erful braking will be applied. At this time,

you may hear a sound in the engine

compartment and feel the vibrations of the

brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-

tive after the vehicle has accelerated to

a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-

ing light, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 117 in Sec-

tion 1–5.

The brake pad wear limit indicators on

your disc brakes give a warning noise

when the brake pads are worn to where

replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise

while driving, have the brake pads

checked and replaced by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-

tor damage can result if the pads are not

replaced when necessary.

When stowing luggage or cargo in the

vehicle, observe the following:

Put luggage or cargo in the luggage

compartment when at all possible. Be

sure all items are secured in place.

Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-

anced. Locating the weight as far for-

ward as possible helps maintain bal-

ance.

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded weight.

CAUTION

To prevent luggage or packages

from sliding forward during braking,

do not stack anything in the lug-

gage compartment higher than the

seatbacks. Keep luggage or pack-

ages low, as close to the floor as

possible.

Do not exceed 66 kg (145 lb.) of

cargo load in the luggage compart-

ment.

Do not place anything on the flat-

tened seat or it may slide forward

during braking.

Brake pad wear limit

indicators Luggage stowage precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

254

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Never allow anyone to ride in the

luggage compartment. It is not de-

signed for passengers. They should

ride in their seats with their seat

belts properly fastened. Otherwise,

they are much more likely to suffer

serious bodily injury, in the event

of sudden braking or a collision.

Do not place anything on the lug-

gage cover. Such items may be

thrown about and possibly injure

people in the vehicle during sudden

braking or an accident. Secure all

items in a safe place.

Do not drive with objects left on

top of the instrument panel. They

may interfere with the driver’s field

of view. Or they may move during

sharp vehicle acceleration or turn-

ing, and impair the driver’s control

of the vehicle. In an accident they

may injure the vehicle occupants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond the

cargo load specified on page 352 in

Section 8.

Your Toyota is equipped with a limited–slip

center differential (transfer). If one wheel

begins to spin, the limited–slip center dif-

ferential (transfer) is designed to aid trac-

tion by automatically transmitting driving

force to the wheels on the other drive

axle. It transmits driving force to the front

wheels if a rear wheel spins, and to the

rear wheels if a front wheel spins.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by a jack.

The vehicle could be driven off the

jack and could pose a danger or re-

sult in serious injury.

NOTICE

Use only a spare tire of the same

brand, size, construction and load ca-

pacity as the original tires on your

Toyota because damage to the limit-

ed–slip differential could possibly oc-

cur with another tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)

is the legal identifier for your vehicle.

This number is on the left top of the

instrument panel, and can be seen

through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number

for your Toyota. It is used in registering

the ownership of your vehicle.

Limited–slip differential

(four–wheel drive models) Your Toyota’s identification—

—Vehicle identification number

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

255

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

also on the Certification Label.

1GR–FE engine

2UZ–FE engine

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown.

—Engine number

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

256

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-

tion labels which are approximately 56

mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce

the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-

ing the tracing and recovery of parts from

stolen vehicles. The label is designed so

that once it is applied to a surface, any

attempt to remove it will result in destroy-

ing the integrity of the label. Transferring

these labels intact from one part to anoth-

er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the

theft prevention labels as it may vio-

late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis

with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It

can cause dangerous handling charac-

teristics resulting in loss of control.

Determine what kind of tires your ve-

hicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high–speed capability

tires best suited to highway driving under

dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the same

traction performance as snow tires, sum-

mer tires are inadequate for driving on

snow–covered or icy roads. For driving on

snow–covered or icy roads, we recom-

mend using snow tires. If installing snow

tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide

better traction in snow and to be adequate

for driving in most winter conditions, as

well as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not have

adequate traction performance compared

with snow tires in heavy or loose snow.

Also, all season tires fall short in accel-

eration and handling performance

compared with summer tires in highway

driving.

Theft prevention labels

(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis Types of tires

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

257

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not mix summer and all season

tires on your vehicle as this can

cause dangerous handling charac-

teristics, resulting in loss of con-

trol.

Do not use tire other than the

manufacturer’s designated tires, and

never mix tires or wheels of the

sizes different from the originals.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

258

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

259

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving

Before starting the engine 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving in various conditions 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Off–road driving precautions 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Winter driving tips 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dinghy towing 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 275. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

260

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,

seat cushion angle, head restraint

height and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view

mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”

position and release it, the cranking hold

function continues to crank the engine in

“ON” position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engine

after about 25 seconds maximum if the

engine has not started yet. When you

crank the engine again, wait a few sec-

onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in “START” position,

the function will keep cranking for about

30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you

need to restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, put the selector le-

ver in “N”. A starter safety device will

prevent the starter from operating if the

selector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to

the floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine How to start the engine—

—Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

261

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-

low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-

ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-

tial multiport fuel injection system in your

engine automatically controls the proper

air–fuel mixture for starting. You can start

a cold or hot engine as follows:

1. With your foot off the accelerator ped-

al, turn the ignition key to “START”

position, then release it.

2. After the engine runs for about 10 se-

conds, you are ready to drive.

If the weather is below freezing, let the

engine warm up for a few minutes before

driving.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-

dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page

278 in Section 4.

NOTICE



Do not race a cold engine.



If the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have the

engine checked immediately.

Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving

onto high, sharp–edged objects and

other road hazards. Failure to do so

can lead to severe tire damage such

as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps

or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-

wise, the impact could cause severe

damage to the tires and/or wheels.

When parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so

that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the

parking brake, and place the transmis-

sion in “P”. If necessary, block the

wheels.

Washing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To

see whether they are wet, check that

there is no traffic near you, and then

press the pedal lightly. If you do not

feel a normal braking force, the brakes

are probably wet. To dry them, drive

the vehicle cautiously while lightly

pressing the brake pedal with the park-

ing brake applied. If they still do not

work safely, pull to the side of the road

and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

(b) Starting the engine Tips for driving in various

conditions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

262

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When you drive on a

bumpy road, it is recommended that

the vehicle height should be set in the

“N” (normal) or “H” (high) mode.

CAUTION

Before driving off, make sure that

the parking brake is fully released

and the parking brake reminder

light is off.

Do not leave your vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is running.

Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. It can cause

dangerous overheating, needless

wear, and poor fuel economy.

To drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.

Remember, if you ride the brakes

excessively, they may overheat and

not work properly.

Be careful when accelerating, up-

shifting, downshifting or braking on

a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-

tion or engine braking, could cause

the vehicle to spin or skid.

Do not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit

permits it, do not drive over 140

km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle

has high–speed capability tires.

Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may

result in tire failure, loss of control

and possible injury. Be sure to con-

sult a tire dealer to determine

whether the tires on your vehicle

are high–speed capability tires or

not before driving at such speeds.

Do not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are

wet, your vehicle will require a

longer stopping distance, and it

may pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Also, the park-

ing brake will not hold the vehicle

securely.

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: If you drive through

deep water over about 500 mm (20

in.) in depth, put the vehicle height

in the “H” (high) mode with the

height select switch and then turn

off the rear height control air sus-

pension by pushing the “HEIGHT

CONTROL OFF” switch. Drive your

vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or low-

er speed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

263

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When driving your vehicle off–road, please

observe the following precautions to en-

sure your driving enjoyment and to help

prevent the closure of areas to off–road

vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where

off–road vehicles are permitted to trav-

el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’s

permission before entering private prop-

erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.

Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-

strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-

tions are wet, driving techniques should

be changed or travel delayed to pre-

vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and

Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining

to driving your vehicle off–road, consult

the following organizations.

State and Local Parks and Recreation

Departments

State Motor Vehicle Bureau

Recreational Vehicle Clubs

U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

Land Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

Drive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks by

driving in dangerous places.

Do not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off–road. A

bad bump could jerk the wheel and

injure your hands. Keep both hands

and especially your thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in

sand, mud, water or snow.

After driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check

that there is no grass, bush, paper,

rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off

any such matter from the under-

body. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering

to the underbody, a breakdown or

fire could occur.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

When driving off–road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

Off–road driving precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

264

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE



If driving through water, such as

when crossing shallow streams,

first check the depth of the water

and the bottom of the river bed for

firmness. Drive slowly and avoid

deep water.



Take all necessary safety measures

to ensure that water damage to the

engine or other components does

not occur.

Water entering the engine air intake

will cause severe engine damage.

Water can wash the grease from

wheel bearings, causing rusting and

premature failure, and may also en-

ter the differentials, transmission

and transfer case, reducing the gear

oil’s lubricating qualities.



Sand and mud that has accumulated

in brake drums and around brake

discs may affect braking efficiency

and may damage brake system com-

ponents.



Always perform a maintenance in-

spection after each day of off–road

driving that has taken you through

rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.

For scheduled maintenance informa-

tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-

tenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-

tected against freezing.

Your coolant must contain ethylene–glycol

type coolant for a proper corrosion protec-

tion of aluminum components. Use “Toyota

Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent.

See page 326 in Section 7–2 for details

about coolant type selection.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or

plain water alone.

When it is extremely cold, we recommend

to use 60% solution for your Toyota, to

provide protection down to about –50C

(–58F). Do not use more than 70% solu-

tion for better coolant performance.

Check the condition of the battery and

cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of

any battery, so it must be in top shape

to provide enough power for winter start-

ing. Section 7–3 tells you how to visually

inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer

and most service stations will be pleased

to check the level of charge.

Winter driving tips

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

265

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is

suitable for the cold weather.

See page 324 in Section 7–2 for recom-

mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-

mer oil in your vehicle during winter

months may cause harder starting. If you

are not sure about which oil to use, call

your Toyota dealer—he will be pleased to

help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de–icer or glycerine into the

locks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-

freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota

dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow

the manufacturer’s directions for how

much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake when

there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into

“P” and block the front wheels. Do not

use the parking brake, or snow or water

accumulated in and around the parking

brake mechanism may freeze, making it

hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating

under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders

can make steering difficult. During bad

winter driving, stop and check under the

fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,

we recommend you carry some emer-

gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the

vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,

bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,

jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to be

dinghy towed (with four wheels on the

ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four

wheels on the ground. This may

cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

266

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a

passenger–and–load–carrying vehicle. Tow-

ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on

handling, performance, braking, durability

and driving economy (fuel consumption,

etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend

on the proper use of correct equipment

and cautious driving habits. For your safe-

ty and the safety of others, you must not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your

local Toyota dealer for further details be-

fore towing.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When disconnecting a

trailer, put the vehicle height in the

“LO” (low) mode and push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn off the rear height control air

suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may be changed in the auto-

matic leveling function, resulting in

accident. For details see “Rear height

control air suspension” on page 158

in Section 1–6.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-

er weight, gross combination weight,

gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight

and trailer tongue load are all within

the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue load

can be measured with platform scales

found at a highway weighing station, build-

ing supply company, trucking company,

junk yard, etc.

For weight carrying hitch

Also for weight distributing hitch

Trailer towing

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

267

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

The maximum gross trailer weight

(trailer weight plus cargo weight)

must never exceed the following for

vehicle with equipped. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

According to the hitch receiver

type, the maximum gross trailer

weight and hitch that can be used

differs. Refer to the above illustra-

tions to confirm the hitch receiver

type for your vehicle.

For weight carrying hitch

2268 kg (5000 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch

1GR–FE engine

Two–wheel drive models

3039 kg (6700 lb.)

Four–wheel drive models

2903 kg (6400 lb.)

2UZ–FE engine

Two–wheel drive models

3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Four–wheel drive models

3175 kg (7000 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-

ing over 2268 kg (5000 lb.), Toyota

recommends to use a weight dis-

tributing hitch.

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-

ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is

necessary to use a sway control

device with sufficient capacity. The

combination of the gross trailer

weight added to the total weight of

the vehicle, occupants and vehicle

cargo must never exceed a total of

the following.

For weight carrying hitch

1GR–FE engine

4354 kg (9600 lb.)

2UZ–FE engine

4422 kg (9750 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch

1GR–FE engine

5034 kg (11100 lb.)

2UZ–FE engine

5443 kg (12000 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight of

the trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-

hicle and trailer combination, can

cause an accident resulting in seri-

ous personal injuries.

Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-

ent weight capacities established by

the hitch manufacturer. Even though

the vehicle may be physically capa-

ble of towing a higher weight, the

operator must determine the maxi-

mum weight rating of the particular

hitch assembly and never exceed

the maximum weight rating speci-

fied for the trailer–hitch. Exceeding

the maximum weight rating set by

the trailer hitch manufacturer can

cause an accident resulting in seri-

ous personal injuries.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

268

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The gross vehicle weight must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) indicated on the

Certification Label. The gross vehi-

cle weight is the sum of weights of

the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer

tongue load. It also includes the

weight of any special equipment

installed on your vehicle.

The load on either the front or rear

axle resulting from distribution of

the gross vehicle weight on both

axles must not exceed the front and

rear Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR) listed on the Certification

Label.

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight 100 = 10%

The trailer cargo load should be

distributed so that the tongue load

is 10% of the total trailer weight,

not exceeding the maximum load of

the following.

For weight carrying hitch

227 kg (500 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch

1GR–FE engine

Two–wheel drive models

303 kg (670 lb.)

Four–wheel drive models

290 kg (640 lb.)

2UZ–FE engine

Two–wheel drive models

331 kg (730 lb.)

Four–wheel drive models

317 kg (700 lb.)

Never load the trailer with more

weight in the back than in the

front. About 60% of the trailer load

should be in the front half of the

trailer and the remaining 40% in the

rear.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

269

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

HITCHES

If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you

should consult with your Toyota dealer.

Use only a hitch recommended by the

hitch manufacturer and the one which

conforms to the total trailer weight re-

quirement.

According to the hitch receiver type,

the maximum gross trailer weight and

hitch that can be used differs. Refer to

the above illustrations to confirm the

hitch receiver type for your vehicle.

If you wish to install an aftermarket

hitch, the hitch must be bolted securely

to the vehicle frame and installed ac-

cording to the hitch manufactures’ in-

structions.

The hitch ball and king pin should have

a light coat of grease.

Toyota recommends the ball mount as-

sembly be removed when not towing to

prevent injury and to prevent damage

in the event of a rear end collision.

After removing the ball mount assem-

bly, install the grommet to the hitch to

prevent entry of dirt and mud.

NOTICE



Do not install weight distributing

hitch to weight carrying hitch re-

ceiver because it will be damaged

your vehicle.



Do not use axle–mounted hitches as

they can cause damage to the axle

housing, wheel bearings, wheels or

tires. Also, never install a hitch

which may interfere with the normal

function of an Energy Absorbing

Bumper, if so equipped.

1 Trailer ball load rating

2 Ball diameter

3 Shank length

4 Shank diameter

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

270

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter-

mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-

plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size

for the trailer coupler. Most couplers

are stamped with the required trailer

ball size. The sizes you will most likely

find stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

III and IV 2 5/16 in.

II 2in.

I1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to

match or exceed the gross trailer

weight rating of the trailer. The trailer

ball load rating should be printed on

the top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, the

threaded ball shank must protrude be-

yond the bottom of the lock washer

and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer

ball shank must be matched to the ball

mount hole diameter size.

NOTICE

Only use a ball mount attachment

specified for the Toyota 4runner.

1 Coupler

2 Trailer ball

3 Ball mount attachment

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO

TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap-

plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer

ball setup on must be the proper height

for the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

Toyota recommends trailers with

brakes that conform to any applica-

ble federal and state/provincial regu-

lations.

A safety chain must always be used

between the towing vehicle and the

trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the

chain for turns. The chain should

cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping to

the ground in case it becomes dam-

aged or separated. For correct safety

chain procedures, follow the hitch or

trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

271

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

If the total trailer weight exceeds

453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are

required.

Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-

draulic system as it would lower its

braking effectiveness.

Never tow a trailer without using a

safety chain securely attached to

both the trailer and the vehicle. If

damage occurs to the coupling unit

or hitch ball, there is danger of the

trailer wandering over into another

lane.

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING

BRAKE CONTROLLER

Your vehicle is equipped with a service

connector for the towing brake controller

as shown. Link the connector to the tow-

ing brake controller via the sub wire har-

ness stored in the glove box. The detailed

explanation of the sub wire harness circuit

is packed together with the sub wire har-

ness.

Be sure to position the towing brake con-

troller where it does not prevent the driver

from operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire har-

ness be stored in the glove box when it

is not in use.

TIRES

Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are

properly inflated. See page 332 in Sec-

tion 7–2 and page 356 in Section 8 for

instructions.

The trailer tires should be inflated to

the pressure recommended by the trail-

er manufacturer in respect to the total

trailer weight.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

272

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER

LIGHTS

Your vehicle is equipped with a wire

harness stored in the rear end under

body. Some models are fitted with a

socket for trailer lights under the rear

bumper. Use either of them to connect

and operate the trailer lights. However,

the trailer lights must comply with fed-

eral, state/provincial and local regula-

tions. See your local recreational ve-

hicle dealer or rental agency for the

correct type of wiring and relays for

your trailer. Check for correct operation

of the turn signals and stop lights each

time you hitch up. Direct splicing may

damage your vehicle’s electrical system

and cause a malfunction of your lights.

The towing connector can be also con-

nected to the trailer brake and trailer

sub battery.

BREAK–IN SCHEDULE

Toyota recommends that you do not

tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a

vehicle with any new power train com-

ponent (engine, transmission, differen-

tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first

800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance due

to the additional load. For this informa-

tion, please refer to the scheduled

maintenance information in the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.

Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing

ball and bracket after approximately

1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

CONNECTING A TRAILER (models with

rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and

perform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen-

sion in the “LO” (low) mode. Turn the

ignition switch off or push the “HEIGHT

CONTROL OFF” switch to turn off the

rear height control air suspension.

2. Connect a trailer.

3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn on the rear height control air sus-

pension. Select the “N” (normal) mode

with the height select switch.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

273

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (models

with rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and

perform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen-

sion in the “LO” (low) mode. (Make

sure the vehicle height is in the “LO”

(low) mode by pushing the height se-

lect switch on the “” side.)

2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn off the rear height control air sus-

pension.

3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on

the ground and raise the hitch by 100

mm (4 in.).

4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn on the rear height control air sus-

pension.

5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the

rear vehicle height is lowered by the

automatic leveling function.

6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If

not, raise the hitch higher and repeat

steps 2 through 5.

7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO”

(low) mode where the hitch does not

touch anything in the “N” (normal)

mode.

8. Put the rear height control air suspen-

sion in the “N” (normal) mode.

PRE–TOWING SAFETY CHECK

Check that your vehicle remains level

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is

hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has

an abnormal nose–up or nose–down

condition, and check for improper

tongue load, overload, worn suspension

or other possible causes.

Make sure the trailer cargo is securely

loaded so that it cannot shift.

Check that your rear view mirrors con-

form to any applicable federal, state/

provincial or local regulations. If not,

install the rear view mirrors required

for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will

handle differently than when not tow-

ing. The three main causes of vehicle–

trailer accidents are driver error, exces-

sive speed and improper trailer loading.

Keep these in mind when towing:

Before starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle–trailer connec-

tions. After driving a short distance,

stop and recheck the lights and con-

nections. Before actually towing a trail-

er, practice turning, stopping and back-

ing with a trailer in an area away from

traffic until you learn the feel.

Backing with a trailer is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the bottom of

the steering wheel and move your hand

to the left to move the trailer to the

left. Move your hand to the right to

move the trailer to the right. (This pro-

cedure is generally opposite to that

when backing without a trailer.) Also,

just turn the steering wheel a little at

a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged

turning. Have someone guide you when

backing to reduce the risk of an acci-

dent.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

274

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Because stopping distance may be in-

creased, vehicle–to–vehicle distance

should be increased when towing a

trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of

speed, allow at least one vehicle and

trailer length between you and the ve-

hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as

you may skid, resulting in jackknifing

and loss of control. This is especially

true on wet or slippery surfaces.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-

tion.

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.

The trailer could hit your vehicle in a

tight turn. Slow down before making a

turn to avoid the necessity of sudden

braking.

Remember that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be closer than

the vehicle wheels to the inside of the

turn. Therefore, compensate for this by

making a larger than normal turning

radius with your vehicle.

Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect handling of your vehicle

and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention

to the rear from time to time to pre-

pare yourself for being passed by large

trucks or buses, which may cause your

vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying

happens, firmly grip the steering wheel

and reduce speed immediately but

gradually. Never increase speed. Steer

straight ahead. If you make no extreme

correction with the steering or brakes,

the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

Be careful when passing other ve-

hicles. Passing requires considerable

distance. After passing a vehicle, do

not forget the length of your trailer and

be sure you have plenty of room befo-

re changing lanes.

In order to maintain engine braking effi-

ciency, do not put the transmission in

“D”.

Because of the added load of the trail-

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat

on hot days (at temperatures over

30C [85F]) when going up a long or

steep grade with a trailer. If the engine

coolant temperature gauge indicates

overheating, immediately turn off the air

conditioning (if in use), pull off the road

and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” on page 282 in

Section 4.

Always place wheel blocks under both

the vehicle and trailer wheels when

parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.

Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-

ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it

cannot be avoided, do so only after

performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-

der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release your brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

275

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When restarting out after parking on a

slope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,

start the engine. Be sure to keep the

brake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal and slowly pull or back away

from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply

your brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or

the posted towing speed limit,

whichever is lower. Because insta-

bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle–

trailer combination usually in-

creases as the speed increases, ex-

ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may

cause loss of control.

Slow down and downshift before

descending steep or long downhill

grades. Do not make sudden down-

shifts.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down

too long or too frequently. This

could cause the brakes to overheat

and result in reduced braking effi-

ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take

it easy. It will help make your vehicle last

longer, too. Here are some specific tips

on how to save money on both fuel and

repairs:

Keep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causes

tire wear and wastes fuel. See page

332 in Section 7–2 for instructions.

Do not carry unneeded weight in

your vehicle. Excess weight puts a

heavier load on the engine, causing

greater fuel consumption.

Avoid lengthy warm–up idling. Once

the engine is running smoothly, begin

driving—but gently. Remember, howev-

er, that on cold winter days this may

take a little longer.

Put the selector lever into the “D”

when engine braking is not required.

5–speed automatic transmission—Driv-

ing with the selector lever in “4” will

reduce the fuel economy. (For details,

see “Automatic transmission (5–speed)”

on page 129 in Section 1–6.)

4–speed automatic transmission—Driv-

ing with the selector lever in “3” will

reduce the fuel economy. (For details,

see “Automatic transmission (4–speed)”

on page 134 in Section 1–6.)

How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

276

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Accelerate slowly and smoothly.

Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high

gear as quickly as possible.

Avoid long engine idling. If you have

a long wait and you are not in traffic,

it is better to turn off the engine and

start again later.

Avoid engine lugging or over–rev-

ving. Use a gear position suitable for

the road on which you are travelling.

Avoid continuous speeding up and

slowing down. Stop–and–go driving

wastes fuel.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and

braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try

to time the traffic signals so you only

need to stop as little as possible or

take advantage of through streets to

avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-

tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-

den braking. This will also reduce wear

on your brakes.

Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams

whenever possible.

Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal. This causes premature wear,

overheating and poor fuel economy.

Maintain a moderate speed on high-

ways. The faster you drive, the greater

the fuel consumption. By reducing your

speed, you will cut down on fuel con-

sumption.

Keep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and

slow down on rough roads. Improper

alignment not only causes faster tire

wear but also puts an extra load on

the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

Keep the bottom of your vehicle free

from mud, etc. This not only lessens

weight but also helps prevent corro-

sion.

Keep your vehicle tuned–up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-

er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil

and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.

all lower engine performance and con-

tribute to poor fuel economy. For longer

life of all parts and lower operating

costs, keep all maintenance work on

schedule, and if you often drive under

severe conditions, see that your vehicle

receives more frequent maintenance.

(For scheduled maintenance informa-

tion, please refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-

al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast

down hills. Your power steering and

brake booster will not function with-

out the engine running. Also, the

emission control system operates

properly only when the engine is run-

ning.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

277

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency

If your vehicle will not start 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot increase the engine speed 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle becomes stuck 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 298. . . . . . . .

If you lose your keys 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 299. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

278

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Before making these checks, make sure

you have followed the correct starting pro-

cedure given in “How to start the engine”

on page 260 in Section 3 and that you

have sufficient fuel. Also, check whether

the other keys will start the engine. If

they work, your key may be broken. Have

the key checked at your Toyota dealer. If

none of your keys work, there may be a

malfunction in the immobiliser system. Call

your Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page

10 in Section 1–2.)

If the engine is not turning over or is

turning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals are

tight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch

on the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out

when the starter is cranked, the battery

is discharged. You may try jump start-

ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page

279 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will

not start, it needs adjustment or repair.

Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair

shop.

NOTICE

Do not pull– or push–start the ve-

hicle. It may damage the vehicle or

cause a collision when the engine

starts. Also the three–way catalytic

converter may overheat and become a

fire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normal

speed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or

“LOCK” and try starting the engine

again.

2. If the engine will not start, the engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded

engine” on page 278 for further instruc-

tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota

dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to

“START” with the accelerator pedal fully

depressed, and hold the key at this posi-

tion for about 30 seconds. Then the

cranking hold function stops cranking au-

tomatically, and you can try starting the

engine with your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a few

minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer

or qualified repair shop for assistance.

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

279

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To avoid serious personal injury and

damage to your vehicle which might re-

sult from battery explosion, acid burns,

electrical burns, or damaged electronic

components, these instructions must be

followed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow this

procedure, we strongly recommend that

you seek the help of a competent me-

chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

Batteries contain sulfuric acid

which is poisonous and corrosive.

Wear protective safety glasses when

jump starting, and avoid spilling

acid on your skin, clothing, or ve-

hicle.

If you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove

any contaminated clothing and flush

the affected area with water imme-

diately. Then get immediate medical

attention. If possible, continue to

apply water with a sponge or cloth

while en route to the medical office.

The gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or

spark is brought near. Use only

standardized jumper cables and do

not smoke or light a match while

jump starting.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals

and related accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must

be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you

are sure that the booster battery is

correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in

another vehicle, make sure the vehicles

are not touching. Turn off all unneces-

sary lights and accessories.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs

from the booster and discharged batter-

ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents

on the batteries. (This helps reduce the

explosion hazard, personal injuries and

burns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the

booster battery is not running, start it

and let it run for a few minutes. During

jump starting run the engine at about

2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

280

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Positive

terminal

(“+” mark)

Jumper cable Positive terminal

(“+” mark)

Booster

battery

Discharged battery

4. Make the cable connections in the or-

der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive

(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the positive (red) jumper cable to

the positive (+) terminal on the booster

battery.

Discharged battery

Booster battery

Negative

terminal

(“–” mark)

Jumper cable

c. Connect the clamp of the negative

(black) jumper cable to the negative (–)

terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the negative (black) jumper cable to

a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic

point of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

The recommended connecting points

are shown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 1GR–FE engine

Connecting point for 2UZ–FE engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

281

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not connect the cable to or near

any part that moves when the engine

is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to

avoid serious injury, do not lean over

the battery or accidentally let the

jumper cables or clamps touch any-

thing except the correct battery termi-

nals or the ground.

5. Start your engine in the normal way.

After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm

for several minutes with the accelerator

pedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the

exact reverse order: the negative cable

and then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover

cloths—they may now contain sulfuric

acid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery vent

plugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent (for example, lights left on),

you should have it checked at your Toyota

dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or

“LOCK”, and try starting the engine

again.

If the engine will not start, see “If your

vehicle will not start” on page 278 in this

Section.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

If the engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may

be a problem somewhere in your electronic

throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

If your engine stalls while

driving If you cannot increase the

engine speed

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

282

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If your engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates overheating, if you ex-

perience a loss of power, or if you hear

a loud knocking or pinging noise, the

engine has probably overheated. You

should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-

hicle and turn on your emergency

flashers. Put the transmission in “P”

and apply the parking brake. Turn off

the air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.

Wait until the steam subsides before

opening the hood. If there is no coolant

boiling over or steam, leave the engine

running.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep

the hood closed until there is no

steam. Escaping steam or coolant is

a sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the

radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.

However, note that water draining from

the air conditioning is normal if it has

been used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep

hands and clothing away from the

moving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the

coolant is leaking, stop the engine im-

mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-

sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and

there are no obvious leaks, you may

help the engine cool down more quickly

by running it at about 1500 rpm for a

few minutes with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,

add coolant to the reservoir while the

engine is running. Fill it about half full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiator

cap when the engine and radiator are

hot. Serious injury could result from

scalding hot fluid and steam blown

out under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperature

has cooled to normal, again check the

coolant level in the reservoir. If neces-

sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-

ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the

system. You should have it checked as

soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle overheats

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

283

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place well away from

the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center

divider of a highway. Park on a level

spot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on your

emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and put

the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle

on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions thor-

oughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe the

following to reduce the possibility of

personal injury:

Follow jacking instructions.

Do not put any part of your body

under the vehicle supported by the

jack. Otherwise, personal injury may

occur.

Do not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by the

jack.

Stop the vehicle on a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking brake

and put the transmission in “P”.

Block the wheel diagonally opposite

to the one being changed if neces-

sary.

Make sure to set the jack properly

in the jack point. Raising the ve-

hicle with jack improperly posi-

tioned will damage the vehicle or

may allow the vehicle to fall off the

jack and cause personal injury.

Never get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the jack

alone.

Use the jack only for lifting your

vehicle during wheel changing.

Do not raise the vehicle with some-

one in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do not

place any objects on top of or un-

derneath the jack.

Raise the vehicle only high enough

to remove and change the tire.

NOTICE



Do not continue driving with a de-

flated tire. Driving even a short dis-

tance can damage a tire and wheel

beyond repair.



Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When jacking up or

installing the tire chains, be sure to

turn off the rear height control and

stop the engine. Otherwise, the ve-

hicle height may change in the au-

tomatic leveling function, resulting

in accident.

If you have a flat tire—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

284

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Get the required tools and spare

tire.

1. Tool bag

2. Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency, you

should familiarize yourself with the use of

the jack, each of the tools and their stor-

age locations.

When storing the tool bag, make sure it

is securely held by the tightening strap.

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1

until the jack is free.

To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 until

the jack is firmly secured to prevent it

flying forward during a collision or sudden

braking.

To remove the spare tire under the lug-

gage compartment:

1. Put a jack handle and jack handle ex-

tensions together as shown in the il-

lustration.

1. Jack handle extensions

2. Jack handle

—Required tools and spare

tire

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

285

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When connecting a jack handle extension

with jack handle end, use a Phillips–head

screwdriver or jack handle to tighten the

bolts on the joints as shown in the il-

lustration.

When connecting the jack handle with ex-

tension, tighten the bolt on the joint se-

curely.

When you tighten the bolt, make sure that

it fits into the depression on the joint.

NOTICE

Tighten all joints securely. Otherwise,

the extension may come off and it

may damage the paint or vehicle

body.

2. Insert the end of the jack handle exten-

sion into the lowering screw and turn

it counterclockwise with the handle.

3. After the tire is lowered completely to

the ground, remove the holding brack-

et.

When storing the spare tire, put it in place

with the outer side of the wheel facing up.

Then secure the tire, taking care that the

tire goes straight up without catching on

any other part, to prevent it from flying

forward during a collision or sudden brak-

ing.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

286

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite

the flat tire to keep the vehicle from

rolling when it is jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheel

block in front of one of the front wheels

or behind one of the rear wheels.

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using the

beveled end of the wheel nut wrench as

shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the ornament by

hand. Take due care in handling the

ornament to avoid unexpected person-

al injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before rais-

ing the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to

loosen. To get maximum leverage, fit the

wrench to the nut so that the handle is

on the right side, as shown above. Grab

the wrench near the end of the handle

and pull up on the handle. Be careful that

the wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew

them about one–half turn.

—Blocking the wheel —Removing wheel ornament —Loosening wheel nuts

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

287

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts

or nuts. The nuts may loose and the

wheels may fall off, which could cau-

se a serious accident.

Front Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct jack

point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on a

level and solid place.

JACK POINTS:

Front—Under the frame side rail

Rear—Under the rear axle housing

Put a jack handle, jack handle extensions

and jack handle end together as shown in

the illustration.

1. Jack handle end

2. Jack handle extensions

3. Jack handle

—Positioning the jack

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

288

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When connecting a jack handle extension

with jack handle end, use a Phillips–head

screwdriver or jack handle to tighten the

bolts on the joints as shown in the il-

lustration.

When connecting the jack handle with ex-

tension, tighten the bolt on the joint se-

curely.

When you tighten the bolt, make sure that

it fits into the depression on the joint.

NOTICE

Tighten all joints securely. Otherwise,

the extension may come off and it

may damage the paint or vehicle

body.

Front of vehicle

6. After making sure that no one is in

the vehicle, as the jack touches the

vehicle and begins to fit, double–

check that it is properly positioned.

Rear side only—

When positioning the jack under the rear

axle housing, make sure the groove on

the top of the jack fits with the rear axle

housing.

—Raising your vehicle

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

289

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

7. Raise the vehicle high enough so

that the spare tire can be installed.

Remember you will need more ground

clearance when putting on the spare tire

than when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle

end into the jack (it is a loose fit) and

turn it clockwise with the handle.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when the

vehicle is supported by the jack

alone.

8. Remove the wheel nuts and change

tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it

aside.

Roll the spare wheel into position and

align the holes in the wheel with the bolts.

Then lift up the wheel and get at least the

top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle

the tire and press it back over the other

bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove any cor-

rosion on the mounting surfaces with a

wire brush or such. Installation of wheels

without good metal–to–metal contact at the

mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to

loosen and eventually cause a wheel to

come off while driving.

—Changing wheels

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

290

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger

tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end in-

ward) and tighten them as much as you

can by hand. Press back on the tire back

and see if you can tighten them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts

or nuts. Doing so may lead to over-

tightening the nuts and damaging the

bolts. The nuts may loose and the

wheels may fall off, which could cau-

se a serious accident. If there is oil

or grease on any bolt or nut, clean

it.

10. Lower the vehicle completely and

tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle extension counter-

clockwise with handle to lower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and turn

it clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do not

use other tools or any additional leverage

other than your hands, such as a hammer,

pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench

is securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in the

order shown. Repeat the process until all

the nuts are tight.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

291

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle, make

sure all portions of your body and

all other persons around will not be

injured as the vehicle is lowered to

the ground.

Have the wheel nuts tightened with

torque wrench to 110 N·m (11.5

kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soon as pos-

sible after changing wheels. Other-

wise, the nuts may loosen and the

wheels may fall off, which could

cause a serious accident. 11. Reinstall the wheel ornament.

Put the wheel ornament into position and

then tap it firmly with the side or heel of

your hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the orna-

ment to avoid unexpected personal

injury.

12. Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specification

designated on page 356 in Section 8. If

the pressure is lower, drive slowly to the

nearest service station and fill to the cor-

rect pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation

valve cap as dirt and moisture could get

into the valve core and possibly cause air

leakage. If the cap is missing, have a new

one put on as soon as possible.

13. Restow all the tools, jack and flat

tire securely.

As soon after changing wheels as pos-

sible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torque

specified on page 356 in Section 8 with

a torque wrench. Have a technician repair

the flat tire.

—Reinstalling wheel ornament —After changing wheels

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

292

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all the

tools, jack and flat tire are securely

in place in their storage location to

reduce the possibility of personal in-

jury during a collision or sudden

braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,

mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt

to rock the vehicle free by moving it

forward and backward.

Turn off the traction control system to

become unstuck to allow the tires to

spin enough to remove the vehicle from

the obstruction. (For details, see “Trac-

tion control system” on page 145 in

Section 1–6.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle

free by moving it forward and back-

ward if people or objects are any-

where near the vehicle. During the

rocking operation the vehicle may

suddenly move forward or backward

as it becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or ob-

jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe the

following precautions to prevent dam-

age to the transmission and other

parts.



Do not depress the accelerator ped-

al while shifting the selector lever

or before the transmission is com-

pletely shifted to forward or reverse

gear.



Do not race the engine and avoid

spinning the wheels.



If your vehicle remains stuck after

rocking the vehicle several times,

consider other ways such as tow-

ing.

If your vehicle becomes stuck

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

293

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

Two–wheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Four–wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice. In consultation with them, have

your vehicle towed using either (a) or

(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towing

service from a Toyota dealer or com-

mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-

hicle carefully in accordance with the

instructions given in “—Emergency tow-

ing” on page 295 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure that

your vehicle is not damaged while being

towed. Commercial operators are generally

aware of the state/provincial and local

laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is

towed incorrectly. Although most operators

know the correct procedure, it is possible

to make a mistake. To avoid damage to

your vehicle, make sure the following pre-

cautions are observed. If necessary, show

this page to the tow truck driver.

If your vehicle needs to be

towed—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

294

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,

and abide by the state/provincial and local

laws. The wheels and axle on the ground

must be in good condition. If they are

damaged, use a towing dolly.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When your vehicle is

towed, put the vehicle height in the

“N” (normal) mode and push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn off the rear height control air

suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may be changed in the auto-

matic leveling function, resulting in

accident. For details, see “Rear

height control air suspension” on

page 158 in Section 1–6.

Two–wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front

with the rear wheels on the ground,

as this may cause serious damage to

the transmission.

From rear—Place the ignition key in the

“ACC” position.

NOTICE



When lifting wheels, take care to

ensure adequate ground clearance

for towing at the opposite end of

the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the

bumper and/or underbody of the

towed vehicle will be damaged dur-

ing towing.



Do not tow with the key removed or

in the “LOCK” position, as the

steering lock mechanism is not

strong enough to hold the front

wheels straight while towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

Four–wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

FULL–TIME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

MODELS

Use a towing dolly under the wheels not

lifted by the truck.

MULTI–MODE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

MODELS

From front—

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front

with the rear wheels on the ground,

as this may cause serious damage to

the transmission.

From rear—We recommend using a tow-

ing dolly under the front wheels. If you do

not use a towing dolly, place the ignition

key in the “ACC” position, put the trans-

mission in “N” and the multi–mode control

switch knob in “H2”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

295

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE



When lifting wheels, take care to

ensure adequate ground clearance

for towing at the opposite end of

the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the

bumper and/or underbody of the

towed vehicle will be damaged dur-

ing towing.



Do not tow with the key removed or

in the “LOCK” position when tow-

ing from the rear without a towing

dolly. The steering lock mechanism

is not strong enough to hold the

front wheels straight.

(b) Using flat bed truck

type truck

All models—

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-

ther from the front or rear. This may

cause body damage.

Front

Rear

—Emergency towing

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

296

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-

rarily towed by a cable or chain se-

cured to either emergency towing eyelet

under the front of the vehicle or the

left emergency towing eyelet under the

rear of the vehicle. Use extreme caution

when towing the vehicles.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet;

otherwise your vehicle may be dam-

aged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard–surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, drive train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-

hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which would place

excessive stress on the emergency

towing eyelet and towing cable or

chain. The eyelet and towing cable or

chain may break and cause serious

injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically

intended for use in towing vehicles.

Securely fasten the cable or chain to

the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake

and put the transmission in “N”. The key

must be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON”

(engine running).

Four–wheel drive models—On multi–mode

four–wheel drive models, put the multi–

mode control switch knob in “H2”. On full–

time four–wheel drive models, unlock the

center differential.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

297

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Before emergency towing, check that

the eyelet is not broken or damaged

and that the installation bolts are not

loose.

Fasten the towing cable or chain se-

curely to the eyelet.

Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady

and even force.

To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical

angle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet is

used to get out when your vehicle

becomes struck in mud, sand or oth-

er condition from which the vehicle

cannot be driven out under its own

power, make sure to observe the pre-

cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,

excessive stress will be put on the

eyelet and the towing cable or chain

may break, causing serious injury or

damage.

If the towing vehicle can hardly

move, do not forcibly continue the

towing. Contact your Toyota dealer

or a commercial tow truck service

for assistance.

Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

Keep away from the vehicle during

towing.

The following methods are effective to

get out when your vehicle is struck in

mud, sand or other condition from

which the vehicle cannot be driven out

under its own power. Use extreme cau-

tion when towing vehicles. In addition,

keep away from the vehicles and towing

cable or chain when towing.

Remove the soil and sand in the front

and the back of the tires.

Place a stone or wood under the tires.

—Emergency towing eyelet

precautions —Tips for towing a stuck

vehicle

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

298

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If you cannot shift the selector lever

out of “P” position to other positions

even though the brake pedal is de-

pressed, use the shift lock override but-

ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”

position. Make sure the parking

brake is set.

2. Pry up the cover with a flat–bladed

screwdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent

into the hole to push down the shift

lock override button. You can shift

out of “P” position only while push-

ing the button.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,

keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked by

your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

You can purchase a new key at your

Toyota dealer if you can give them the

key number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contact

your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If

you lose all your master keys, you cannot

make new keys; the whole engine immobi-

liser system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” on

page 10 in Section 1–2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and

you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota

dealers can still open the door for you,

using their special tools. If you must

break a window to get in, we suggest

breaking the smallest side window be-

cause it is the least expensive to replace.

Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from

the glass.

If you cannot shift automatic

transmission selector lever If you lose your keys

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

299

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Please contact your nearest Toyota

dealer and you can purchase a new

wireless remote control transmitter.

Have the registered identification numbers

of your transmitters deleted from your ve-

hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to avoid the possibility of theft or

an accident. Then, have the identification

number of your new transmitter registered.

At the same time, you must bring all of

the remaining transmitters to have them

registered again as well.

If you lose your wireless

remote control transmitter

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

300

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

301

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CORROSION PREVENTION AND

APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion prevention and appearance care

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washing and waxing your Toyota 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the interior 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rain clearing mirrors 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

302

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Toyota, through the diligent research, de-

sign and use of the most advanced

technology available, helps prevent corro-

sion and provides you with the finest qual-

ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to

you. Proper care of your Toyota can help

ensure long–term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion

to your vehicle are:

The accumulation of road salt, dirt and

moisture in hard–to–reach areas under

the vehicle.

Chipping of paint, or undercoating

caused by minor accidents or by

stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live

in particular areas or operate your ve-

hicle under certain environmental condi-

tions:

Road salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the pres-

ence of salt in the air near the sea–

coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

High humidity accelerates corrosion es-

pecially when temperatures range just

above the freezing point.

Wetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period

of time, may cause corrosion even

though other parts of the vehicle may

be dry.

High ambient temperatures can cause

corrosion to those components of the

vehicle which do not dry quickly due to

lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep

your vehicle, particularly the underside, as

clean as possible and to repair any dam-

age to paint or protective coatings as

soon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on your

Toyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of

course, necessary to keep your vehicle

clean by regular washing, but to prevent

corrosion, the following points should be

observed:

If you drive on salted roads in the

winter or if you live near the ocean,

you should hose off the undercarriage

at least once a month to minimize cor-

rosion.

High pressure water or steam is effec-

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside

and wheel housings. Pay particular

attention to these areas as it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to simply wet the

mud and debris without removing. The

lower edge of doors, rocker panels and

frame members have drain holes which

should not be allowed to clog with dirt

as trapped water in these areas can

cause corrosion.

Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-

oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on

page 303 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’s

paint and trim. If you find any chips or

scratches in the paint, touch them up im-

mediately to prevent corrosion from start-

ing. If the chips or scratches have gone

through the bare metal, have a qualified

body shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota from

corrosion

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

303

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-

ter and dirt can accumulate under the

floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry. Be particularly care-

ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-

ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be

transported in proper containers. If a spill

or leak should occur, immediately clean

and dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If you

drive on salted or gravel roads, mud

shields help protect your vehicle. Full–size

shields, which come as near to the ground

as possible, are the best. We recommend

that the fittings and the area where the

shields are installed be treated to resist

corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be

happy to assist in supplying and installing

the shields if they are recommended for

your area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated

garage or a roofed place. Do not park

your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-

lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in

the garage, or if you drive it covered with

water or snow, your garage may be so

damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if

your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can

corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regular

washing.

The following cases may cause weakness

to the paint or corrosion to the body and

parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-

sible.

When driving in a coastal area

When driving on a road sprinkled with

antifreeze

When having coal tar, tree sap, bird

droppings and carcass of an insect

When driving in the areas where there

is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust

and chemical substances

When the vehicle becomes remarkably

dirty with dust and mud

Hand–washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until the

vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,

be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-

move any mud or road salt from the

underside of the vehicle or in the

wheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car–wash soap,

mixed according to the manufacturer’s

instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and

keep it wet by dipping it frequently into

the wash water. Do not rub hard—let

the soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high–

pressure car wash, for example) at or

near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler

door opened. If the water enters the air

vent, you may experience trouble with re-

fueling or rough engine idling.

Rear height control air suspension: Do not

spray a jet of high–pressure water at the

air suspension unit, especially the air

spring, at an extremely close range. This

may damage the air suspension.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic

wheel ornaments are damaged easily by

organic substances. If any organic sub-

stances splashes an ornament, be sure to

wash it off with water and check if the

ornament is damaged.

Washing and waxing your

Toyota

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

304

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damaged

plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off

the wheel and cause accidents while

the vehicle is moving.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap

or neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not

scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper

faces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or

cleaners that are marked safe for painted

surfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-

line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-

vents), which may be toxic or cause

damage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can

cause streaking. In hot weather you

may need to rinse each section right

after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle

using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not

rub or press hard—you might scratch

the paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-

matic car wash, but remember that the

paint can be scratched by some types of

brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the

washing process itself. Scratching reduces

paint durability and gloss, especially on

darker colors. The manager of the car

wash should be able to advise you wheth-

er the process is safe for the paint on

your vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommended

to maintain the original beauty of your

Toyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle

surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-

fore you begin waxing, even if you are

using a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If

the finish has become extremely weath-

ered, use a car–cleaning polish, fol-

lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions and

precautions. Be sure to polish and wax

the chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when water

does not bead but remains on the sur-

face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers if

your vehicle is re–painted and placed

in a high heat paint waxing booth.

High temperatures could damage the

bumpers.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

305

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Vehicles with side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or

spill liquid on the floor. This may

prevent the side airbags and curtain

shield airbags from activating cor-

rectly, resulting in serious injury.

Do not wash the vehicle floor with

water, or allow water to get onto

the floor when cleaning the vehicle

interior or exterior. Water may get

into audio components or other

electrical components above or un-

der the floor carpet (or mat) and

cause a malfunction; and it may

cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easily

cleaned with a mild soap or detergent

and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-

move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or

soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the

vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few

minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt

and wipe off the soap with a clean damp

cloth. If all the dirt does not come off,

repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-

ing–type vinyl cleaners are also available

which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s

instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline

or window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam–type shampoo to

clean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove

as much dirt as possible. Several types of

foam cleaners are available; some are in

aerosol cans and others are powders or

liquids which you mix with water to pro-

duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,

use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.

Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results are

obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as

possible. Read the shampoo instructions

and follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned with

mild soap and water or with lukewarm

water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-

ing, check the belts for excessive wear,

fraying, or cuts.

Cleaning the interior

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

306

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE



Do not use dye or bleach on the

belts—it may weaken them.



Do not use the belts until they be-

come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with any

household window cleaner.

NOTICE



When cleaning the inside of the

rear window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the heater wires

or connectors.



When cleaning the inside of the

rear quarter window, be careful not

to scratch or damage the printed

antenna.

Air conditioning control panel, car au-

dio, instrument panel, console panel

and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-

warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE



Do not use organic substances (sol-

vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.

These chemicals can cause discol-

oring, staining or peeling of the

surface.



If you use cleaners or polishing

agents, make sure their ingredients

do not include the substances men-

tioned above.



If you use a liquid car freshener, do

not apill the liquid onto the ve-

hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-

tain the ingredients mentioned

above. Immediately clean any spill

using the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleaned

with neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened

with 5% solution of neutral detergent for

wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces

of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the

leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean

cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-

lated shaded area.

NOTICE



If a stain should fail to come out

with a neutral detergent, apply a

cleaner that does not contain an

organic solvent.



Never use organic substances such

as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or

alkaline or acid solutions for clean-

ing the leather as these could

cause discoloring.



Use of a nylon brush or synthetic

fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the

fine grained surface of the leather.



Mildew may develop on soiled leath-

er upholstery. Be especially careful

to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your

upholstery always clean.



Long exposure to direct sunlight

may cause the leather surface to

harden and shrink. Keep your ve-

hicle in a shaded area, especially in

the summer.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

307

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)



The interior of your vehicle is apt

to heat up on hot summer days, so

avoid placing on the upholstery

items made of vinyl or plastic or

containing wax as these tend to

stick to leather when warm



Improper cleaning of the leather up-

holstery could result in discolor-

ation or staining.

If you have any questions about the

cleaning of your Toyota, your local

Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer

them.

On some models, the outside rear view

mirrors have been coated to produce a

“rain clearing” effect. This coating

causes the raindrops to spread, clear-

ing the driver’s rear view when it rains.

It is sufficient to wash the mirrors with

water for day to day care.

The rain clearing effect is reduced in

drizzle and light rain.

In the following cases, the rain clearing

effect will be reduced temporarily, but will

gradually recover.

After wiping dirt off the mirrors

When the mirrors fog up

After waxing your vehicle in an auto-

matic car wash

After your vehicle has been parked for

a long period in underground parking

lots, etc. where there is no direct sun-

light.

If you would like to restore the rain clear-

ing effect to its normal level immediately

in the above cases, wash the mirrors with

neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.

NOTICE

To maintain the rain clearing ability,

and prevent the mirrors from being

scratched, observe the following pre-

cautions.



Do not use any glass cleaners that

contain compounds.



If ice should jam the mirror, do not

scrape the mirror. Use a spray de–

icer to free the mirror.



Wash off any wax stuck to the mir-

rors with neutral detergent and

rinse thoroughly as any wax on the

surface of the mirrors can cause

the rain clearing effect to be lost.



Do not use any water repellents as

they can destroy the rain clearing

effect. If any repellent gets stuck on

the surface of the mirrors, wash it

off with neutral detergent, then

rinse thoroughly.

Rain clearing mirrors

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

308

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

309

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE

Vehicle maintenance and care

Maintenance requirements 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Does your vehicle need repairing? 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 314. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

310

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for

fewer maintenance requirements with long-

er service intervals to save both your time

and money. However, each regular mainte-

nance, as well as day–to–day care, is

more important than ever before to ensure

smooth, and trouble–free, safe, and eco-

nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure the specified maintenance, including

general maintenance service, is performed.

Note that both the new vehicle and emis-

sion control system warranties specify that

proper maintenance and care must be per-

formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day–

to–day care practices that are important to

your vehicle for proper operation. It is the

owner’s responsibility to ensure that the

general maintenance items are performed

regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done

either by yourself or a qualified technician,

or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be

pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in

the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those

required to be serviced at regular inter-

vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”

or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacement

parts used for maintenance or for the

repair of the emission control system

be Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non–Toyota

supplied parts for replacement pur-

poses without invalidating the emission

control system warranty. However, use

of replacement parts which are not of

equivalent quality may impair the effec-

tiveness of the emission control sys-

tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-

nance, replacement, or repair of the

emission control devices and system

performed by any automotive repair es-

tablishment or individual without invali-

dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-

ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement” for complete war-

ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well–trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through technical

bulletins, service tips, and in–dealership

training programs. They learn to work on

Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,

rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyota

dealer’s service department performs the

best job to meet the maintenance require-

ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-

nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that

all required maintenance has been per-

formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-

lems should arise with your vehicle while

under warranty, your Toyota dealer will

promptly take care of it. Again, be sure

to keep a copy of the repair order for any

service performed on your Toyota.

What about do–it–yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy

to do yourself if you have a little mechani-

cal ability and a few basic automotive

tools. Simple instructions for how to per-

form them are presented on page 315 in

Section 7.

Maintenance requirements

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

311

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If you are a skilled do–it–yourself mechan-

ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-

mended. Please be aware that do–it–your-

self maintenance can affect your warranty

coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance

items that should be performed as fre-

quently as specified. In addition to check-

ing the items listed, if you notice any

unusual noise, smell or vibration, you

should investigate the cause or take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-

fied service shop immediately. It is recom-

mended that any problem you notice be

brought to the attention of your dealer or

the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-

quate ventilation if you run the en-

gine.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performed

from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Tire pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge every

two weeks, or at least once a month. See

page 332 in Section 7–2 for additional

information.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage

or excessive wear. See page 333 in Sec-

tion 7–2 for additional information. When

checking the tires, make sure no nuts are

missing, and check the nuts for loose-

ness. Tighten them if necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the mainte-

nance schedule. (For scheduled mainte-

nance information, please refer to the sep-

arate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page

334 in Section 7–2 for additional informa-

tion.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-

ter or other fluid after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. If you smell fuel

fumes or notice any leak, have the cause

found and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including back door

operate smoothly and all latches lock se-

curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-

ondary latch secures the hood from open-

ing when the primary latch is released.

General maintenance

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

312

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checked

regularly, e.g. while performing periodic

services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights

are all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.

Be alert for changes in steering condition,

such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-

erate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in any position. Check that the

head restraint move up and down smooth-

ly and that the locks hold securely in any

latched position. For folding–down rear

seatbacks and swing–up rear seat cush-

ions, check that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as

buckles, retractors and anchors operate

properly and smoothly. Make sure that the

belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or

damaged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

uneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

that the pedal has the proper clearance.

Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

At a safe place, check that the brakes do

not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper travel

and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle

is held securely with only the parking

brake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-

nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle

is held securely with the selector lever in

“P” position and all brakes released.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checked

from time to time, e.g. each time when

refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the

tank. See page 343 in Section 7–3 for

additional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between

the “F” and “L” lines on the see–through

reservoir when the engine is cold. See

page 326 in Section 7–2 for additional

information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and

condenser are clean and not blocked with

leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 328 in

Section 7–2 for additional information.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

313

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica-

tor color. See page 340 in Section 7–3 for

additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.

See page 328 in Section 7–2 for addition-

al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the

engine turned off and the vehicle parked

on a level spot. See page 324 in Section

7–2 for additional information.

Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. The

level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”

range depending on the fluid temperature.

See page 329 in Section 7–2 for addition-

al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of

the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have

the cause located and corrected immedi-

ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on

page 247 in Section 2.)

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-

mance, sounds, and visual tip–offs that

indicate service is needed. Some impor-

tant clues are as follows:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

Appreciable loss of power

Strange engine noises

A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-

ter dripping from the air conditioning

after use is normal.)

Change in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide

leak. Drive with the windows open and

have the exhaust system checked im-

mediately.)

Flat–looking tire; excessive tire squeal

when cornering; uneven tire wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when driving

straight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspension

movement

Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake pedal; pedal almost

touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side

when braking

Engine coolant temperature continually

higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. It probably needs adjustment or

repair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-

hicle unchecked. It could result in se-

rious vehicle damage and possibly

personal injury.

Does your vehicle need

repairing?

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

314

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Some states have vehicle emission in-

spection programs which include OBD

(On–Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation

of the emission control system. When the

OBD system determines that a problem

exists somewhere in the emission control

system, the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on. In this case, your vehicle may

not pass the I/M test and need to be

repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to

service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp

does not come on, your vehicle may not

pass the I/M test as readiness codes

have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set

during ordinary driving. However, when the

battery is disconnected or run down, the

codes are erased. Also, depending on

your driving habits, the codes may not be

completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had

come on recently due to temporary mal-

function such as a loose fuel tank cap,

your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips, but the

error code in the OBD system will not be

cleared unless about 40 trips or more are

taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

even the malfunction indicator lamp does

not come on, contact your Toyota dealer

to prepare the vehicle for re–testing.

Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

351

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications

Dimensions and cargo load 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service specifications 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tires 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

352

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Model:

1GR–FE and 2UZ–FE

Type:

1GR–FE engine

6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

2UZ–FE engine

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):

1GR–FE engine

94.0 95.0 (3.70 3.74)

2UZ–FE engine

94.0 84.0 (3.70 3.31)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):

1GR–FE engine 3956 (241.4)

2UZ–FE engine 4664 (284.6)

Dimensions and cargo load

Overall width mm (in.)

2790 (109.8)

Overall height∗1mm (in.)

1575 (62.0)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.) 1575 (62.0)

Rear tread mm (in.)

66 (145)

∗1: Unladen vehicle

∗2: With two–wheel drive models

∗3: With four–wheel drive models

∗4: With roof rails

∗5: With rear spoiler

∗6: With rear height control air suspension

Overall length mm (in.)

Cargo load kg (lb.)

4800 (189.0)

1875 (73.8)

1820 (71.7)∗2or3,4

1765 (69.5)∗2, 5

1760 (69.3)∗3, 5

1755 (69.1)∗2

1750 (68.9)∗3

1810 (71.3)∗2or3,4,6

1750 (68.9)∗2or3,5,6

1740 (68.5)∗2or3,6

Engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

353

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Fuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

For improved vehicle performance, the

use of premium unleaded gasoline with

an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-

tane Number 96) or higher is recom-

mended.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):

87 (23.0, 19.1)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

1GR–FE engine

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)

Exhaust 0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)

2UZ–FE engine

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)

Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:

1GR–FE engine

DENSO K20HR–U11

NGK LFR6C11

2UZ–FE engine

DENSO SK20R11

NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):

1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.

qt.):

1GR–FE engine

With filter 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)

Without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3)

2UZ–FE engine

With filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5)

Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and

viscosity.

Oil grade:

API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 5W–30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

Fuel Service specifications

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

354

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1GR–FE engine 9.8 (10.4, 8.6)

2UZ–FE engine 12.3 (13,0, 10.8)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” is

filled in your Toyota vehicle. In order to

avoid technical problems, we strongly

recommend using “Toyota Genuine Long

Life Coolant” or equivalent.

With ethylene–glycol type coolant for a

proper corrosion protection of aluminum

components

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or

plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for

further details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20C (68F):

12.6—12.8 V Fully charged

12.2—12.4 V Half charged

11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-

ter the key is removed with all the

lights turned off

Charging rates:

5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),

L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1GR–FE engine

Up to 2.0 (2.1, 1.8)

2UZ–FE engine

Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Fluid type:

Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV

Change automatic transmission fluid only

as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change

automatic transmission fluid only if your

vehicle is driven under one of the Special

Operating Conditions listed in your

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When

changing the automatic transmission fluid,

use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV”

(ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in

assuring optimum transmission perfor-

mance.

Notice: Using automatic transmission

fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF

Type T–IV” may cause deterioration in

shift quality, locking up of your trans-

mission accompanied by vibration, and

ultimately damage the automatic trans-

mission of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

TRANSFER

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Oil type:

Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 75W–90

DIFFERENTIAL (1GR–FE engine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Two–wheel drive models 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Four–wheel drive models

Front 1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Oil type:

Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Recommended oil viscosity:

Front

SAE 75W–90

Rear

Above –18C (0F)

SAE 90

Below –18C (0F)

SAE 80W or 80W–90

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

355

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DIFFERENTIAL (2UZ–FE engine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Two–wheel drive models 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Four–wheel drive models

Front 1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Oil type:

Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Recommended oil viscosity:

Above –18C (0F)

SAE 90

Below –18C (0F)

SAE 80W or 80W–90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Propeller shafts:

Spiders and slide yokes

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI

No.2

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed

with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)

with the engine running, mm (in.):

55 (2.2)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):

1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressed

with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):

5—7 clicks

Fluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:

Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII

or III

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

356

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse

2. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

3. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, high

mounted stoplight, shift lock control

system, anti–lock brake system, trac-

tion control system (two–wheel drive

models), active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models), vehicle sta-

bility control system, rear height control

air suspension, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, trailer brake controller,

trailer lights (tail lights)

Tires

Tire size

Tire pressure

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Front Rear

P265/70R16 111S

P265/65R17 110S

220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32)

Wheel size

16 7J∗1

16 7JJ∗2

17 71/2JJ

Tire size, pressure and wheel size:

∗1: Vehicles with steel wheels

∗2: Vehicles with aluminum wheels

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing

wheels), see “Checking tire pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precau-

tions”, pages 332 through 337 in Section 7–2.

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):

110 (11.5, 83)

Fuses

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

357

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Instrument panel

4. AC115V INV 15 A: AC inverter

5. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

6. OBD 7.5 A: On–board diagnosis sys-

tem

7. HEAD (LO RH) 10 A: Right–hand

headlight (low beam)

8. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Left–hand head-

light (low beam)

9. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Right–hand head-

light (high beam)

10. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Left–hand head-

light (high beam)

11. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

12. HEATER NO.2 7.5 A: Air conditioning

system

13. AIRSUS NO.2 10 A: Rear height con-

trol air suspension

14. SEAT HEATER 25 A: Seat heaters

15. DEFOG 30 A: Rear window defogger,

multiport fuel injection system/sequen-

tial multiport fuel injection system

16. MIR HEATER 10 A: Outside rear view

mirror heater

17. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal

lights, wireless remote control system,

door courtesy lights, rear seat audio

system, gauge and meter, vanity lights,

instrument panel lights, running board

lights, multiplex communication system

18. RADIO NO.1 20 A: Audio system, nav-

igation system

19. ECU–B 10 A: Anti–lock brake system,

navigation system, traction control sys-

tem (two–wheel drive models), active

traction control system (four–wheel

drive models), vehicle stability control

system, air conditioning system, multi-

plex communication system, theft deter-

rent system

20. ALT–S 7.5 A: Charging system

21. HORN 10 A: Horns

22. A/F HEATER 15 A: No circuit

23. TRN–HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights,

emergency flashers

24. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

25. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection

system

26. DR/LCK 20 A: Power door lock system

27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter

28. RADIO NO.2 20 A: Audio system

29. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection

system, anti–lock brake system, trac-

tion control system (two–wheel drive

models), active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models), vehicle sta-

bility control system, stop light, meter

and gauge

30. SRS 10 A: SRS airbag system

31. GAUGE 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

32. STA NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injec-

tion system/sequential multiport fuel in-

jection system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

358

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

33. FR WIP–WSH 30 A: Windshield wipers

and washer

34. 4WD 20 A: Four–wheel drive control

system

35. D P/SEAT 30 A: Driver’s power seat

36. P P/SEAT 30 A: Front passenger’s

power seat

37. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

38. RR WSH 15 A: Rear window washer,

multiplex communication system

39. ECU–IG 10 A: Shift lock control sys-

tem, power windows, anti–lock brake

system, traction control system (two–

wheel drive models), active traction

control system (four–wheel drive mod-

els), vehicle stability control system,

electric moon roof, multiplex commu-

nication system, theft deterrent system,

rear height control air suspension

40. IG1 15 A: Anti–lock brake system,

traction control system (two–wheel

drive models), active traction control

system (four–wheel drive models), ve-

hicle stability control system, air condi-

tioning system, charging system, rear

window defogger, back–up lights, turn

signal lights, emergency flashers, seat

heaters, AC inverter, instrument panel

light control, auto anti–glare inside rear

view mirror, SRS airbag system

41. STA 7.5 A: No circuit

42. SECU/HORN 10 A: Theft deterrent sys-

tem

43. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plate

lights, parking lights, instrument panel

light control, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, instrument panel lights,

meter and gauge, grove box light

44. ACC 7.5 A: Power outlets, outside rear

view mirrors, audio system, navigation

system, rear seat audio system, shift

lock control system, instrument panel

lights

45. CIG 10 A: No circuit

Fuses (type B)

46. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system

47. AIRSUS 50 A: Rear height control air

suspension

48. AM1 50 A: All components in “ACC”,

“CIG”, “IG1”, “ECU–IG”, “FR WIP–

WSH”, “RR WIP”, “RR–WSH”, “4WD”,

and “STA” fuses

49. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake con-

troller

50. J/B 50 A: All components in “PWR

OUTLET”, “D P/SEAT”, “P P/SEAT”,

“POWER”, “TAIL” and “SECU/HORN”

fuses

51. BATT CHG 30 A: Trailer sub battery

52. TOWING 40 A: Trailer lights (tail

lights)

53. ABS MTR 40 A: Anti–lock brake sys-

tem, traction control system (two–wheel

drive models), active traction control

system (four–wheel drive models), ve-

hicle stability control system

54. AM2 30 A: Starter system, “IGN”,

“GAUGE”, “STA NO.2” and “SRS” fuses

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

359

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

55. ABS SOL 50 A: Anti–lock brake sys-

tem, traction control system (two–wheel

drive models), active traction control

system (four–wheel drive models), ve-

hicle stability control system

56. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electric

moon roof

Fuses (type C)

57. ALT 140 A: All components in “AM2”,

“ALT–S”, “DR/LCK”, “TRN–HAZ”,

“HORN”, “RADIO NO.2”, “EFI”,

“TOWING”, “ABS MTR”, “ABS SOL”

and “ETCS” fuses

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

360

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

361

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.

OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADING

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and uniform

tire quality grading

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uniform tire quality grading 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

362

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If you believe that your vehicle

has a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Toyota Motor

Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

(Toll–free: 1–800–331–4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of ve-

hicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor

Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei-

ther call the Auto Safety Hotline

toll–free at 1–800–424–9393 (or

366–0123 in Washington, D.C.

area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.

Department of Transportation,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can

also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from the Hot-

line.

This information has been prepared in ac-

cordance with regulations issued by the

National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

tration of the U.S. Department of Trans-

portation. It provides the purchasers and/

or prospective purchasers of Toyota

vehicles with information on uniform tire

quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any

questions you may have as you read this

information.

DOT quality grades—All passenger car

tires must conform to Federal Safety

Requirements in addition to these

grades. Quality grades can be found

where applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maximum

section width. For example: Treadwear

200 Traction AA Temperature A

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners Uniform tire quality grading

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

363

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is a

comparative rating based on the wear rate

of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test

course. For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and a half (1–1/2) times

as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual condi-

tions of their use, however, and may de-

part significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service prac-

tices and differences in road characteris-

tics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction

grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,

B, and C, and they represent the tire’s

ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of asphalt

and concrete. A tire marked C may have

poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on braking (straight

ahead) traction tests and does not include

cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, C—The temperature

grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissi-

pate heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature

can cause the material of the tire to de-

generate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a lev-

el of performance which all passenger car

tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for this

tire are established for a tire that is prop-

erly inflated and not overloaded. Exces-

sive speed, underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combina-

tion, can cause heat buildup and possible

tire failure.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

364

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster overview 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Side vents

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Personal lights

6. Electric moon roof switch

7. Garage door opener

8. Auxiliary boxes

9. Glove box

10. Automatic transmission selector lever

11. Power door lock switches

12. Power window switches

13. Seat heater switches

14. “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch

15. Rear vents

16. Trash holder

17. Height select switch

18. “DAC” switch

19. Front cup holders

20. Tilt steering lock release lever

Instrument panel overview

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

21. Telescopic steering lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal

23. Window lock switch

24. Power rear view mirror control switches

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Instrument panel light control dial

2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

3. Audio remote control switches

4. Wiper and washer switches

5. Power back window switch

6. Car audio

7. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light

8. Engine immobiliser/theft deterrent

system indicator light

9. Multi–information display

10. Emergency flasher switch

11. Air conditioning controls

12. Auxiliary box

13. Back window and rear view mirror

defogger switch

14. Four–wheel drive control switch knob

(full–time four–wheel drive models) or

multi–mode control switch knob

(multi–mode four–wheel drive models)

15. Ignition switch

16. Cruise control switch

17. Hood lock release lever

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

18. Fuel filler door opener

19. “TRAC OFF” switch

20. Center differential lock switch

21. Power outlet main switch

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Trip meter reset button

2. Tachometer

3. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Low fuel level warning light

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

8. Odometer and two trip meters

9. Odometer/two trip meter changeover

button

Instrument cluster overview

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Anti–lock brake system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Vehicle stability control system warning

light∗1

Traction control system warning light∗1

(two–wheel drive models)

Active traction control system warning light∗1

(four–wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system warning

light∗1 (four–wheel drive models)

Hill–start assist control system warning

light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning

light∗1 (for vehicles sold in Canada)

Engine immobiliser/theft deterrent system

indicator light

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Cruise control indicator light∗5

Center differential lock indicator light∗3

(four–wheel drive models)

Automatic transmission indicator lights

(5–speed)

Traction control system off indicator light

(two–wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light

(four–wheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Low speed four–wheel drive indicator light∗3

(four–wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system indicator light

(four–wheel drive models)

Height control “OFF” indicator light∗4

Height control indicator lights

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 117 in Section 1–5.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Four–wheel drive system” on page

141 in Section 1–6.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Four–wheel drive system” on page

138 and on page 141 in Section 1–6.

∗4: If this light flashes, see “Rear height control air suspension”

on page 158 in Section 1–6.

∗5: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 164 in

Section 1–6.

Headlight high beam indicator light

Automatic transmission indicator lights

(4–speed)

Four–wheel drive indicator light∗2

(multi–mode four–wheel drive models)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Keys and Doors

Keys 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine immobiliser system 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side doors 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power windows 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power back window 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back door 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hood 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft deterrent system 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel tank cap 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric moon roof 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your vehicle is supplied with the two

kinds of keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys work

in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will

need one of them to make a new key

with a built–in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key does not

work in the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobiliser

system has been placed in the head of

the master and sub keys. These chips are

needed to enable the system to function

correctly, so be careful not to lose these

keys. If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the system

or start the engine.

To protect items locked in the glove box

when using valet parking, leave the sub

key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-

out a key, you should always carry a

spare key in case you accidentally lock

your keys inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-

ponder chip, observe the following

precautions:



When starting the engine, do not

use the key with a key ring resting

on the key grip and do not press

the key ring against the key grip.

Otherwise the engine may not start,

or may stop soon after it starts.

Keys

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)



When starting the engine, do not

use the key with other transponder

keys around (including keys of oth-

er vehicles) and do not press other

key plates against the key grip.

Otherwise the engine may not start,

or may stop soon after it starts. If

this happens, remove the key once

and then insert it again after remov-

ing other transponder keys (includ-

ing keys of other vehicles) from the

ring or while gripping or covering

them with your hand to start the

engine.



Do not bend the key grip.



Do not cover the key grip with any

material that cuts off electromagnet-

ic waves.



Do not knock the key hard against

other objects.



Do not leave the key exposed to

high temperatures for a long period,

such as on the dashboard and hood

under the direct sunlight.



Do not put the key in water or

wash it in an ultrasonic washer.



Do not use the key with electromag-

netic materials.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as

your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you

need additional keys, duplicates can be

made by a Toyota dealer using the key

number.

We recommend writing down the key num-

ber and storing it in a safe place.

The engine immobiliser system is a

theft prevention system. When you in-

sert the key in the ignition switch, the

transponder chip in the key’s head

transmits an electronic code to the ve-

hicle. The engine will start only when

the electronic code in the chip corre-

sponds to the registered ID code for

the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the

key is removed from the ignition switch.

The indicator light will start flashing to

show the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditions

occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

The indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is set-

ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent

system” on page 31 in this Section.)

The indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

The indicator light flashes unsteady.

Engine immobiliser system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Inserting the registered key in the ignition

switch automatically cancels the system,

which enables the engine to start. The

indicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you a

new key with built–in transponder chip,

your dealer will need your key number

and master key. However, there is a limit

to the number of additional keys your

Toyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the sys-

tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-

semble the engine immobiliser sys-

tem. If any unauthorized changes or

modifications are made, the proper

operation of the system cannot be

guaranteed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI–20BTY

MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS–210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn

it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock and

unlock simultaneously with the driver’s

door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the

key once will unlock the driver’s door and

twice in succession will unlock all the side

doors and back door simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un-

lock all the side doors and back door can

be changed to a single key turning opera-

tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-

er.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked with a key, the interior

light, luggage compartment light, ignition

switch light and running board lights (on

some models) will come on and remain on

for about 15 seconds before fading out.

(For details, see “Interior light” on page

105, “Luggage compartment light” on page

107, “Ignition switch light” on page 108

and “Running board lights” on page 108

in Section 1–4.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pulling

the inside handles even if the lock knobs

are in the locked position.

Side doors

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the

front doors while driving. The doors

will open and an accident may occur.

Toyota strongly recommends that all

children be placed in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the

lock position will also lock the door. Be

careful not to lock your keys in the ve-

hicle.

The front doors cannot be locked if you

leave the key in the ignition switch.

Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the

front side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the

rear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locks

or unlocks all the side doors and back

door.

If you do either of the following, no side

door or back door can be unlocked with

the power door lock switch.

Lock all the side doors and back door

with the key or wireless remote control

transmitter when all the side doors and

back door are closed.

Open the driver’s door or front passen-

ger’s door and move the inside lock

knobs of both front doors to the lock

position, then close the front doors.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The power door lock switch can be reset

in the following ways.

Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

Unlock all the side doors and back

door with the key or wireless remote

control transmitter.

Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-

senger’s door with the inside lock

knob, and then unlock all the doors

and back door with the power door

lock switch.

This unlocking protection with the power

door lock switch can be disabled. For de-

tails, contact your Toyota dealer. REAR DOOR CHILD–PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”

position as shown on the label.

This feature allows you to lock a rear

door so it can be opened from the outside

only, not from inside. We recommend us-

ing this feature whenever small children

are in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors

are closed and locked, especially

when small children are in the ve-

hicle. Along with the proper use of

seat belts, locking the doors helps

prevent the driver and passengers

from being thrown out from the ve-

hicle during an accident. It also helps

prevent the doors from being opened

unintentionally.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

You can set the following automatic

door locking and unlocking functions.

(a) Locking linked with the shift posi-

tion

All the side doors and back door are

locked automatically when the automatic

transmission selector lever is moved out

of the “P” position with the engine running

(including ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion) and all the side doors and back door

are closed. This function is the default

setting for new vehicles.

(b) Unlocking linked with the shift posi-

tion

All the side doors and back door are un-

locked automatically when the automatic

transmission selector lever is moved to

the “P” position with the ignition switch in

the “ON” position.

speed

All the side doors and back door are

locked automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 20 km/h (12 mph) or high-

er. However, if any of the side doors and

back door is unlocked during driving, this

auto locking function will not operate until

the unlocked door is opened once.

(d) Unlocking linked with opening the

driver’s door

All the side doors and back door are un-

locked automatically when the driver’s

door is opened within 10 seconds after

the ignition switch is turned from “ON” to

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

SETTING THE FUNCTIONS

1. Close all the side doors and back door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

3. Within 10 seconds after the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position;

To set function (a)

Push and hold the front of the power

door lock switch for 5 seconds with the

automatic transmission selector lever in

the “P” position.

To set function (b)

Push and hold the rear of the power

door lock switch for 5 seconds with the

automatic transmission selector lever in

the “P” position.

To set function (c)

Push and hold the front of the power

door lock switch for 5 seconds with the

automatic transmission selector lever in

any position except “P”.

To set function (d)

Push and hold the rear of the power

door lock switch for 5 seconds with the

automatic transmission selector lever in

any position except “P”.

All the side doors and back door are auto-

matically lock and unlock when you re-

lease the power door lock switch. This

indicates that the function is set. If all the

side doors and back door do not lock and

unlock, the time the switch was held may

have been too short or too long. Perform

the procedure over again starting from

step 1.

If you want to cancel a function, repeat

the procedure. Each time you perform the

procedure, the function is set or can-

celled.

—Automatic door locking and

unlocking functions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

The wireless remote control system is

designed to lock or unlock all the side

doors and back door, open the back

window or activate the “PANIC” mode

from a distance within approximately 1

m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE SIDE

DOORS AND BACK DOOR

To lock and unlock all the side doors

and back door, push the switches of

the transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the

side doors and back door are locked si-

multaneously. At this time one beep will

be heard, and the turn signal lights flash

once.

Check to see that all the side doors and

back door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors or the back door

is not securely closed, locking cannot be

performed by the “LOCK” switch and a

beep will sound continuously for 10 sec-

onds. However, if the key is in the ignition

switch, a beep will not sound.

To stop the buzzer, close all the side

doors and back door securely or push the

“UNLOCK” switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch

once to unlock the driver’s door alone.

Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds

unlocks all the side doors and back door

simultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”

switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,

and the turn signal lights flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all

the side doors and back door can be

changed to a single switch operation. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed,

the interior light, luggage compartment

light, ignition switch light and running

board lights (on some models) will come

on and remain on for about 15 seconds

before fading out. (For details, see “Interi-

or light” on page 105, “Luggage compart-

ment light” on page 107, “Ignition switch

light” on page 108 and “Running board

lights” on page 108 in Section 1–4.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after

using the wireless remote unlock feature.

If a door is not opened by then, all the

side doors and back door will be automati-

cally locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lock

function can be changed. For details, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

—Wireless remote control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept

pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-

tion is not repeated. Release the switch

and then push again.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the wireless door locking or

unlocking function

Cancelling the flash of the turn signal

lights

Changing the volume of beep sound

OPENING THE BACK WINDOW

To open the back window, push the

back window open switch of the trans-

mitter for about 1 second. The window

will fully open.

At this time, you can hear a beep.

If the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion, the back window cannot be opened

by the back window open switch.

To open the back window with the key,

see “Power back window” on page 26 in

this Section.

The back window opening program by

wireless remote control can be changed or

disabled. For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

“PANIC” SWITCH

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the

horn intermittently and flashes the

headlights, tail lights and turn signal

lights, and turns on the interior and

luggage compartment lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-

hicle theft when you witness anyone at-

tempting to break into or damage your

vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop

alarm midway, push any of the switch on

the wireless remote control transmitter.

You can also stop the alarm by turning

the ignition key from “LOCK” to the “ON”

position.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The “PANIC” mode does not work when

the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

The wireless remote control transmitter is

an electronic component. Observe the fol-

lowing instructions in order not to cause

damage to the transmitter.

Do not leave the transmitter on places

where the temperature becomes high

such as on the dashboard.

Do not disassemble it.

Avoid knocking it hard against other

objects or dropping it.

Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-

trol transmitters for the same vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed

information.

If the wireless remote control transmitter

does not actuate the doors, back window

or alarm, operate from a normal distance:

Check for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an

airport which can interfere with normal

operation of the transmitter.

The battery may have been consumed.

Check the battery in the transmitter. To

replace the battery, see following

“REPLACING THE BATTERY”.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

avoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-

dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-

mote control transmitter” on page 299 in

Section 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

REPLACING THE BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed transmitter battery or

components.

NOTICE



When replacing the transmitter bat-

tery, be careful not to lose the com-

ponents.



Replace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.



Dispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-

ing these procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the

transmitter case. 2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-

tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

3. Put a new transmitter battery with posi-

tive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE



Make sure the positive side and

negative side of the transmitter bat-

tery should be faced correctly.



Do not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause unexpected

rust.



Do not touch or move any compo-

nents inside of the transmitter, or

it may interfere with proper opera-

tion.



Be careful not to bend the electrode

of the transmitter battery insertion

and that dust or oils do not adhere

to the transmitter case.



Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

transmitter operates properly. If the trans-

mitter still does not operate properly, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

The windows can be operated with the

switch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, all the power windows work for 43

seconds even after the ignition switch is

turned off. It stops working when either

front door is opened.

The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switch

tells you the switch can be operated.

Power windows

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves as

long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.

To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switch

completely down or pull it completely up,

and then release it. The window will fully

open or close. To stop the window part-

way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-

site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: During automat-

ic closing operation or key off closing op-

eration, the window stops and opens half

way if something gets caught between the

window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the power window may not operate

automatically and the jam protection func-

tion will not function correctly after you

reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.

In any of these cases, you should normal-

ize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switch

and lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the window

closes and hold the switch for a sec-

ond.

Make sure that the window opens and

closes automatically. If the power window

cannot be operated properly, have it

checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Window

lock

switch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’s

door or the switches on the driver’s

door that control each passenger’s win-

dow.

The window moves as long as you hold

the switch.

To open: Push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on

the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows

cannot be operated.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.

Before you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is

nobody around the power windows.

You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in a serious injury.

When anyone closes the power win-

dows, make sure he or she oper-

ates the windows safely.

When small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

window switches without supervi-

sion. Use the window lock switch to

prevent them from making unex-

pected use of the switches.

Be sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the power window switches and

get trapped in a window. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

The back window can be operated with

the switch on the instrument panel or

the key operation in the back door key-

hole.

You can open the back window when the

back window wiper is working. At that

time, the wiper stops working until the

window is closed again.

If the back window is not fully closed, the

back window wiper, washer and defogger

will not work. (See “Back window wiper

and washer” on page 110 and “Back win-

dow and outside rear view mirror defog-

gers” on page 110 in Section 1–4.)

Power back window

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the power back window may not

operate automatically and the jam protec-

tion function will not function correctly af-

ter you reconnect, replace or recharge the

battery. In any of these cases, you should

normalize the power back window with the

power back window switch.

To normalize the power back window:

1. Push the “” (down) switch and lower

the window halfway.

2. Push the “” (up) switch until the win-

dow closes and hold the switch for a

second.

Make sure that the window opens and

closes automatically. If the power back

window cannot be operated properly, have

it checked by your Toyota dealer.

OPERATING FROM INSIDE

The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-

tion.

Normal operation: To open or close the

back window, quickly push and release the

“” (down) or “” (up) switch.

Automatic operation: To open or close

the back window, push and hold the “”

(down) or “” (up) switch. The window

will fully open or close. To stop the win-

dow partway, push the switch on either

the “” (down) or “” (up) side briefly.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, it works for 43 seconds even after

the ignition switch is turned off. It stops

working when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function: During automat-

ic closing operation or key off closing op-

eration, the window stops and opens half

way if something gets caught between the

window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

If you push in the window lock switch on

the driver’s door, the back window cannot

be operated.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

The back window can be opened and

closed with the key operation in the back

door keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully counterclock-

wise and hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the window

begins to open. To stop the window part-

way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully clockwise and

hold it.

After the door is locked, the window be-

gins to close. To stop the window partway,

release the key.

This door key linked function can be dis-

abled. For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Jam protection function: During closing

operation, the window stops and opens

half way if something gets caught between

the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.

Before you close the power back

window, always make sure there is

nobody around the power back win-

dow. You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in a serious injury.

When anyone closes the power

back window, make sure he or she

operates the window safely.

When small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

back window switch without super-

vision. Use the window lock switch

to prevent them from making unex-

pected use of the switch.

Be sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the power back window switch

and get trapped in a window. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

Keep the back window closed while

driving. This not only keeps the

luggage from being thrown out but

also prevents exhaust gases from

entering the vehicle.

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

To open the back window with the wire-

less remote control transmitter, see

“—Wireless remote control” on page 18 in

this Section.

To open the back door, pull up the back

door opener.

The back door can be opened when the

vehicle is stopped.

If the back door opener does not operate

except when the battery is disconnected

or run down, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the back door does not open after

you reconnect, replace or recharge the

battery. In any of these cases, you should

normalize the back door.

To normalize the back door, unlock it with

the key, remote control transmitter or pow-

er door lock switch, see “Side doors” on

page 14 in this Section.

Make sure that the back door opens. If

the back door cannot be opened properly,

have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

The back door can be locked or unlocked

in the following ways.

All the side doors and back door lock

and unlock simultaneously with the

back door. Insert the key into the key-

hole, turn it clockwise to lock and turn

it counterclockwise to unlock.

Operate the power door lock switch.

(See “Side doors” on page 14 in this

Section.)

Operate the wireless remote control.

(See “—Wireless remote control” on

page 18 in this Section.)

All the side doors and back door are

locked and unlocked simultaneously

with the driver’s door. (See “Side

doors” on page 14 in this Section.)

If the battery terminal is disconnected and

reconnected, the back door will be auto-

matically locked. Be careful not to lock

your keys in the vehicle.

Back door

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When all the side doors and back door

are unlocked simultaneously with a key,

the interior light, luggage compartment

light, ignition switch light and running

board lights (on some models) will come

on and remain on for about 15 seconds

before fading out. (For details, see “Interi-

or light” on page 105, “Luggage compart-

ment light” on page 107, “Ignition switch

light” on page 108 and “Running board

lights” on page 108 in Section 1–4.)

The back window can be opened and

closed with the key operation in the back

door keyhole. (For details, see “Power

back window” on page 26 in this Section.) When closing the back door, the inside

strap can be used to make the reach

easier.

To close the back door, lower it and press

down on it. After closing the back door,

try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-

ly closed.

Back door closer: When the back door

has not been fully closed, it is automati-

cally closed completely.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” on

page 253 in Section 2 for precautions

when loading luggage.

CAUTION

Keep the back window and back

door closed while driving. This not

only keeps the luggage from being

thrown out but also prevents ex-

haust gases from entering the ve-

hicle.

Careful attention is needed so as

not to get your fingers trapped as

the back door automatically closes

when it has not been fully closed.

Never allow a child to operate the

back door.

NOTICE



To avoid damage to the back door

dampers, do not apply any force,

paint or let any other foreign matter

on them.



Do not apply excessive force when

the back door closer is operating.

Otherwise, the back door closer

may become defective.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The

hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood

is closed and securely locked. Other-

wise, the hood may open unexpected-

ly while driving and an accident may

occur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the

auxiliary catch lever and lift the

hood.

Before closing the hood, check to see that

you have not forgotten any tools, rags,

etc. Then lower the hood and make sure

it locks into place. If necessary, press

down gently on the front edge to lock it.

To deter vehicle theft, the system is

designed to sound an alarm if any of

the side doors, back door or hood is

forcibly unlocked or opened or the bat-

tery terminal is disconnected and then

reconnected when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittently

and flashes the headlights, tail lights and

turn signal lights, and turns on the interior

and luggage compartment lights.

Hood Theft deterrent system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”

position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing when

the key is removed from the ignition

switch. (See “Engine immobiliser system”

on page 12 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, back

door and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when all

the side doors, back door and hood are

closed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after

30 seconds. When the system is set, the

indicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator light

starts flashing, you may leave the ve-

hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when

you set the system, because unlocking

from the inside will activate the system.

CANCELING THE SYSTEM

The system will cancel under the any of

the following conditions:

Any of the side doors, back door or

hood is opened.

Any of the side doors or the back door

is unlocked.

The key is inserted into the ignition.

The battery terminal is reconnected.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm under

the following conditions:

If any of the side doors is unlocked or

opened without the key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter, or if the back

door or hood is forcibly opened.

If the battery terminal is disconnected

and then reconnected.

If the ignition is hotwired.

The indicator light will come on when the

system is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and the

key is not in the ignition switch, all the

side doors and back door will re–lock au-

tomatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-

cally stop and the indicator light will starts

flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resets

the alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under the

same circumstances described in

“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the following

these ways:

Unlock any of the side doors or the

back door with the key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter.

Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”

to “ON” position.

These ways cancel the system at the

same time.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the battery becomes discharged due to

the vehicle being unused for a long time,

etc., when the battery is recharged or re-

placed, the system will give the alarm. If

this happens, immediately unlock any of

the side doors or the back door with the

key or the wireless remote control trans-

mitter, and the alarm will stop.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.

The side doors and back door should

be locked with the key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter. Be sure to

wait until the indicator light goes off or

starts flashing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside.

The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stopping the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the other

doors and hood. When testing the

hood, also check that the system is

activated when the battery terminal is

disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,

have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

This indicates that the fuel filler door

is on the left side of your vehicle. 1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the

lever.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames when refueling.

The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. In hot weath-

er, fuel under pressure could cause

injury by spraying out of the filler

neck if the cap is suddenly re-

moved.

Fuel tank cap

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn

the cap counterclockwise by 90 de-

grees (to the pressure point 1), and

then turn it an additional 30 degrees

(to point 2). Pause slightly before

removing it.

Although a click will be heard as you turn

the cap to point 1, it does not indicate

that the cap can be removed.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh

when the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be stored on

the back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks point

to the left and right or up and down, and

set it in the receptacle on the back side

of the door.

When installing the cap, turn the cap

clockwise until you hear one click.

When you hear the click, the cap is

fully closed.

If the cap is not installed securely, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on.

Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

Make sure the cap is installed se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in

the event of an accident.

Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

cap for replacement. It is designed

to regulate fuel tank pressure.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, ob-

serve the following precautions.



Apply force only in the turning di-

rection to the cap. Do not pull or

pry it.



Do not tighten the cap further after

you hear one click when installing.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use the

switch beside the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closed

by hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDE

OPEN” side.

The roof will fully open automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push the switch on

either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will open while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

The sun shade will be opened together

with the roof.

When the moon roof is opened fully, the

deflector will raise to reduce the entering

of the strong wind. The angle of the de-

flector will be adjusted according to the

vehicle speed.

To close: Push the switch on the “TILT

UP” side.

Electric moon roof

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The roof will fully close automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push the switch on

either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will close while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILT

UP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push the switch on

either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

To tilt down: Push the switch on the

“SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.

To stop the roof partway, push the switch

on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will tilt down while

the switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, it works for 43 seconds even after

the ignition switch is turned off. It stops

working when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function:

If something gets caught between the

moon roof and frame during slide clos-

ing operation, the moon roof stops and

opens half way, and the deflector stops

and raises fully.

If something gets caught between the

moon roof and frame during tilting

down operation, the moon roof stops

and opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the moon roof may not operate

automatically and the jam protection func-

tion will not function correctly after you

reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.

In any of these cases, you should normal-

ize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push and

hold the switch on the “TILT UP” side until

the moon roof tilts all the way up and

then tilts down a little automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens and

closes automatically. If the moon roof can-

not be operated properly, have it checked

by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.

While the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and other

parts of the bodies of all occupants

away from the roof opening. Other-

wise, they could be seriously in-

jured if the vehicle stops suddenly

or if the vehicle is involved in an

accident.

Before you close the moon roof,

always make sure there is nobody

around the moon roof. You must

also make sure nobody places his

or her head, hands and other parts

of the body in the roof opening. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in the closing roof, it could

result in a serious injury. When

anyone closes the moon roof, first

make sure it is safe to do so.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Be sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the moon roof switch and get

trapped in the roof opening. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

Never sit on top of the vehicle

around the roof opening.

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the moon roof is fully

closed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Seats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and Mirrors

Seats 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fold–down rear seats 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Head restraints 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Armrest 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat heaters 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child restraint 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tilt steering wheel 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside rear view mirrors 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti–glare inside rear view mirror 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto anti–glare inside rear view mirror 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear side–view mirrors 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun visors 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-

hicle occupants should have the seatback

upright, sit well back in the seat and prop-

erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle unless the

occupants are properly seated. Do

not allow passengers to sit on top

of a folded–down seatback, or in

the luggage compartment or cargo

area. Persons not properly seated

and/or properly restrained by seat

belts can be severely injured in the

event of emergency braking or a

collision.

During driving, do not allow pas-

sengers to stand up or move

around between seats. Otherwise,

severe injuries can occur in the

event of emergency braking or a

collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with

considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if

the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag

is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of

inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10

in.) from your driver airbag provides

you with a clear margin of safety.

This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your

breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can

change your driving position in sever-

al ways:

Move your seat to the rear as far

as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

Slightly recline the back of the

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the 250

mm (10 in.) distance, even with the

driver seat all the way forward, sim-

ply by reclining the back of the

seat somewhat. If reclining the back

of your seat makes it hard to see

the road, raise yourself by using a

firm, non–slippery cushion, or raise

the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable,

tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of

your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-

ommended by NHTSA above, while

still maintaining control of the foot

pedals, steering wheel, and your view

of the instrument panel controls.

Seats

Front seats—

—Front seat precautions

(on vehicles with SRS front airbags)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury es-

pecially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passen-

ger seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in

the driver and front passenger seats.

Observe the following precautions.

Do not lean against the front door

when the vehicle is in use, since

the side airbag inflates with consid-

erable speed and force. Otherwise,

you may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

Do not use seat accessories which

cover the area where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of front seats

equipped with side airbags. Such

changes may prevent the side air-

bags from activating correctly, dis-

able the system or cause the side

airbags to inflate accidentally, re-

sulting in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Adjustments should not be made

while the vehicle is moving, as the

seat may unexpectedly move and

cause the driver to lose control of

the vehicle.

When adjusting the seat, be careful

that the seat does not hit a passen-

ger or luggage.

After adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the

seat forward and backward to make

sure it is locked in position.

After adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to

make sure the seat is locked in

position.

Do not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere

with the seat–lock mechanism or

unexpectedly push up the seat posi-

tion adjusting lever and the seat

may suddenly move, causing the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Front seat precautions

(on vehicles with SRS side

airbags) —Seat adjustment precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

While adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near

the moving parts. Otherwise, your

hands or fingers may be caught and

injured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull it

up. Then slide the seat to the desired

position with slight body pressure and

release the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING

KNOB

To change the angle of the seat cush-

ion on the front side, turn the knob

either way.

3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER

To change the height of the seat, pull

up or push down the lever.

4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.

Then lean back to the desired angle

and release the lever.

—Adjusting front seats

(manual seat)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding under

the lap belt during a collision, avoid

reclining the seatback any more than

needed. The seat belts provide maxi-

mum protection in a frontal or rear

collision when the driver and the pas-

senger are sitting up straight and

well back in the seats. If you are

reclined, the lap belt may slide past

your hips and apply restraint forces

directly to the abdomen. In the event

of a frontal collision, the more the

seat is reclined, the greater the risk

of personal injury.

5. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumber support will change

while the switch is pushed.

1. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,

SEAT CUSHION ANGLE AND SEAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTING SWITCH

PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired

direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat at

that position.

Do not place anything under the front

seats, as this might interfere with the seat

movement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired

direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-

back at that position.

—Adjusting front seats (power

seat)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding under

the lap belt during a collision, avoid

reclining the seatback any more than

needed. The seat belts provide maxi-

mum protection in a frontal or rear

collision when the driver and the pas-

senger are sitting up straight and

well back in the seats. If you are

reclined, the lap belt may slide past

your hips and apply restraint forces

directly to the abdomen. In the event

of a frontal collision, the more the

seat is reclined, the greater the risk

of personal injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumber support will change

while the switch is pushed.

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold the

center of the lever and pull it up.

Then slide the seat further forward

than the front–most lock position.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-

ver to unlock and push down the

seatback.

When returning the seatback upright, be

careful not to make yourself hit by the

seatback which will bound with consid-

erable spring force.

After returning the seat to its original

position, be certain to replace the head

restraint.

—Flattening seatbacks

(manual seat)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use

the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try

pushing the seat and seatback for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is secured in place. Be certain to

replace head restraint.

1. Remove the head restraint. Push the

seat position adjusting switch for-

ward to slide the seat further for-

ward than the front–most position.

2. Move the seatback angle adjusting

switch backward to flatten the seat-

back.

After returning the seat to its original

position, be certain to replace the head

restraint.

—Flattening seatbacks

(power seat)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use

the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try

pushing the seat and seatback for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is secured in place. Be certain to

replace head restraint.

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT

Stow the rear center seat belt buckle as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckle from

falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckle must be stowed

before you fold the seatback.

If you are using a trash holder, lower

it.

Fold–down rear seats

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Lower the head restraint to the lowe-

st position. 2. Swing the bottom cushion up by

pulling the lock release strap.

If desired, each bottom cushion may be

swung up separately.

3. Push the lock release button and

fold down the seatback.

This will enlarge the luggage compartment

as far as the raised seat cushion. See

“Luggage stowage precautions” on page

253 in Section 2 for precautions when

loading luggage.

If desired, each seatback may be folded

separately.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

WHEN RETURNING THE SEATBACK

If you cannot raise the seatback be-

cause of the locked seat belt, do not

try it forcibly. Release the lock of the

seat belt in the following way. Push in

the lower front edge of the seatback

cushion to slacken the seat belt (1) and

let the seat belt retract a little (2).

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-

cautions in order to prevent personal

injury in a collision or sudden stop:

Make sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

Make sure the bottom cushion is

securely locked by trying to pull up

the edge of the cushion near the

lock release straps.

Make sure to arrange the buckles of

the seat belts in their proper posi-

tion and be ready to use.

Front

Rear

Head restraints

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

For your safety and comfort, adjust the

head restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.

To lower: Push it down while pressing the

lock release button.

Front head restraints—You can also move

the head restraint forward or backward. If

such adjustment is desired, pull or push

the base of the head restraint.

Rear head restraints—When an occupant

sits on the rear seat, always pull up the

rear head restraint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when

it is close to your head. Therefore, using

a cushion on the seatback is not recom-

mended.

CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head re-

straint so that it is closest to the

top of your ears.

After adjusting the head restraint,

make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head re-

straints removed.

To use the armrest, pull it out as

shown above.

This armrest is equipped with a cup hold-

er and tray. (For details, see “Rear cup

holders and tray” on page 232 in Section

1–9.)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,

avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn on the seat heater, move the

dial forward (“L” dial for the left front

seat and “R” dial for the right front

seat). At this time, the indicator light

will illuminate to indicate the seat heat-

er is operating.

Move the dial forward or backward to ad-

just to the desired temperature.

To turn it off, move the dial backward

until it stops.

When the seat heater is not in use, move

the dial fully backward.

The key must be in the “ON” position to

operate seat heaters.

Armrest Seat heaters

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-

erating the seat heater because it

may make them feel too hot or cause

burns at low temperatures (erythema,

varicella). Use extra caution for;

Babies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or handicapped

persons

Persons who have delicate skin

Persons who are exhausted

Persons who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping

drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do

not use the seat heater with a blan-

ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-

jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE



Do not put unevenly weighed ob-

jects on the seat and do not stick

sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)

into the seat.



When cleaning the seats, do not

use organic substances (paint thin-

ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.). They may damage the heater

and seat surface.



To prevent the battery from being

discharged, turn the system off

when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and

passengers in the vehicle be properly re-

strained at all times with the seat belts

provided. Failure to do so could increase

the chance of injury and/or the severity of

injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle

are designed for people of adult size,

large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-

propriate for the child until the child be-

comes large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”

on page 73 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident

statistics, the child is safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the

seat belts should be worn properly. If an

accident occurs and the seat belts are not

worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-

tion of the airbag may cause death or

serious injury to the child.

Seat belts—

—Seat belt precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not allow the child to stand up or

kneel on either rear or front seats. An

unrestrained child could suffer serious in-

jury or death during emergency braking or

a collision. Also do not let the child sit on

your lap. It does not provide sufficient

restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for

specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips and not on the

waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-

ry, first check with your doctor for specific

recommendation.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats

properly wearing their seat belts

whenever the vehicle is moving.

Otherwise, they are much more likely

to suffer serious bodily injury or

death in the event of sudden braking

or a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe

the following:

Use the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for

two or more people—even children.

Avoid reclining the seatbacks too

much. The seat belts provide maxi-

mum protection when the seatbacks

are in the upright position. (Refer

to the seat adjustment instructions.)

Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that

they do not get caught or pinched

in the seat or side doors.

Inspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Damaged parts should be re-

placed. Do not disassemble or

modify the system.

Keep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap

solution or lukewarm water. Never

use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-

ers—they may severely weaken the

belts. (See “Cleaning the interior”

on page 305 in Section 5.)

Replace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a

severe impact. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if damage

is not obvious.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Adjust the seat as needed (front seats

only) and sit up straight and well back

in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it

out of the retractor and insert the tab

into the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts

to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a

sudden stop or on impact. It also may

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A

slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend, and you can move around freely.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

retractor, firmly pull the belt and release

it. You will then be able to smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-

pletely extended and is then retracted

even slightly, the belt is locked in that

position and cannot be extended. This fea-

ture is used to hold the child restraint

system securely. (For details, see “Child

restraint” on page 73 in this Section.) To

free the belt again, fully retract the belt

and then pull the belt out once more.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot

protect an adult occupant or your

child from injury.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder

anchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to

your size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Push in the lock release button

and slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor is

locked in position.

—Front and rear seat belts

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

your shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from your neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Failure to

do so could reduce the amount of

protection in an accident and cause

serious injuries in a collision.

Take up

slack

Too high

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap and

shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips—not on your waist, then ad-

just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder

portion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

Both high–positioned lap belts and

loose–fitting belts could cause seri-

ous injuries due to sliding under

the lap belt during a collision or

other unintended result. Keep the

lap belt positioned as low on hips

as possible.

For your safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under your arm.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To release the belt, press the buckle–re-

lease button and allow the belt to re-

tract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull

it out and check for kinks or twists. Then

make sure it remains untwisted as it re-

tracts.

The rear center seat belt buckle can be

stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckle must be stowed before

you fold the seat back. (See “Fold–down

rear seats” on page 46 in this Section.)

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-

curely because they are not long enough,

a personalized seat belt extender is avail-

able from your Toyota dealer free of

charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer so

that the dealer can order the proper re-

quired length for the extender. Bring the

heaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-

er measurement and selection of length.

Additional ordering information is available

at your Toyota dealer.

—Stowing rear center seat belt

buckle —Seat belt extender

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,

observe the following precautions.

Failure to follow these instructions

could reduce the effectiveness of the

seat belt restraint system in case of

vehicle accident, increasing the

chance of personal injury.

Remember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when

used on a different vehicle, for

another person, or at a different

seating position than the one origi-

nally intended. If the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without wearing the seat belt

when using the extender in the

driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-

bag system will judge that the driv-

er wears the seat belt even if not

wearing it. In this case, the driver’s

airbag may not activate correctly,

causing death or serious injury in

the event of collision. Be sure to

wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

Be sure to wear the seat belt with-

out the seat belt extender if you

can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To connect the extender to the seat

belt, insert the tab into the seat belt

buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on

the buckle–release buttons of the ex-

tender and the seat belt are both facing

outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on

the buckle–release button on the extender,

not on the seat belt. This helps prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and extend-

er itself.

When not in use, remove the extender

and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the seat belt extender is not

twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot

protect an adult occupant or your

child from injury.

The driver and front passenger’s seat

belt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in response to a severe fron-

tal impact.

When the airbag sensor detects the shock

of a severe frontal impact, the front seat

belts are quickly drawn back in by the

retractors so that the belts snugly restrain

the front seat occupants.

The front seat belt pretensioners are acti-

vated even with no passenger in the front

seat.

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-

bags may not operate together in case of

collisions at a certain speeds and angles.

—Front seat belt

pretensioners

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the front seat belt pretensioners

are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, inflators, warning light, inter-

connecting wiring and power sources. (For

details, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 117 in Sec-

tion 1–5.)

The front seat belt pretensioner system

mainly consists of the following compo-

nents and their locations are shown in the

illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies

4. Airbag sensor assembly

The front seat belt pretensioners are con-

trolled by the airbag sensor assembly. The

airbag sensor assembly consists of a saf-

ing sensor and airbag sensor.

When the front seat belt pretensioners are

activated, an operating noise may be

heard and a small amount of smoke–like

gas may be released. This gas is harm-

less and does not indicate that a fire is

occurring.

Once the front seat belt pretensioners

have been activated, the seat belt retrac-

tors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or open

the front seat belt pretensioner as-

semblies, airbag sensor or surround-

ing area or wiring. Doing so may

cause sudden operation of the front

seat belt pretensioners or disable the

system, which could result in death

or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious inju-

ries. Consult your Toyota dealer

about any repairs and modifications.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

front seat belt pretensioners in some

cases.



Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two–way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player



Repairs on or near the front seat

belt retractor assemblies



Modification of the suspension sys-

tem



Modification of the front end struc-

ture



Attachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end



Repairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure or con-

sole

This front seat belt pretensioner system

has a service reminder indicator to inform

the driver of operating problems. If any of

the following conditions occurs, this

indicates a malfunction of the airbags or

pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible to service the

vehicle.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or the light remains on.

The light comes on or flashes while

driving.

If either front seat belt does not retract

or cannot be pulled out due to a mal-

function or activation of the relevant

front seat belt pretensioner.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the front seat belt pretensioners to op-

erate.

Either front seat belt pretensioner as-

sembly or surrounding area is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) front airbags are designed to pro-

vide further protection for the driver

and front passenger in addition to the

primary safety protection provided by

the seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,

the SRS front airbags work together with

the seat belts to help reduce injury by

inflating. The SRS front airbags help to

reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or

front passenger’s head or chest caused by

directly hitting the steering wheel or dash-

board. The front passenger airbag is acti-

vated even with no passenger in the front

seat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seat belt restraint

system by the driver and front passenger

when the SRS front airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or

dashboard during airbag deployment

can be killed or seriously injured.

Toyota strongly recommends that:

The driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while

still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

The front passenger sit as far back

as possible from the dashboard.

All vehicle occupants be properly

restrained using the available seat

belts.

If the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without wearing the seat belt

when using the extender in the

driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-

bag system will judge that the driv-

er wears the seat belt even if not

wearing it. In this case, the driver’s

airbag may not activate correctly,

causing death or serious injury in

the event of collision. Be sure to

wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the SRS airbags are operating

properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, inflators, warning light, inter-

connecting wiring and power sources. (For

details, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 117 in Sec-

tion 1–5.)

The SRS front airbags are designed to

deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-

sions where the magnitude and duration

of the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle exceeds the designed threshold

level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the

severity of the impact is above the de-

signed threshold level, comparable to an

approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision

when the vehicle has the impact straight

into a fixed barrier that does not move or

deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher if the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a parked vehicle or

sign pole, which can move or deform on

impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision (e.g. a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,

or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions

where the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle is very close to the designed thresh-

old level, the SRS front airbags and the

seat belt pretensioners may not activate

together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally not

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a side or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low–

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient

forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-

ployment of the SRS front airbags may

occur.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Hitting a curb, edge

of pavement or

hard material

Falling into or

jumping over

a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy

if a serious impact occurs to the under-

side of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system mainly consists of

the following components, and their loca-

tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Airbag module for front passenger

(airbag and inflator)

4. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

5. Driver’s seat position sensor

6. Airbag sensor assembly

7. Airbag module for driver

(airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a

safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the

forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an

impact results in a forward deceleration

beyond the designed threshold level, the

system triggers the airbag inflators. At this

time a chemical reaction in the inflators

very quickly fills the airbags with non–tox-

ic gas to help restrain the forward motion

of the occupants. The airbags then quickly

deflate, so that there is no obstruction of

the driver’s vision should it be necessary

to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

loud noise and release some smoke and

residue along with non–toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can physically and

safely exit the vehicle after a collision,

you should do so at the first opportunity.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, primarily to the head and chest, it

may also cause other, less severe injuries

to the face, chest, arms and hands. These

are usually in the nature of minor burns

or abrasions and swelling, but the force of

a deploying airbag can cause more seri-

ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s

hands, arms, chest or head are in close

proximity to the airbag module at the time

of deployment. This is why it is important

for the occupant to: avoid placing any

object or part of the body between the

occupant and the airbag module; sit

straight and well back into the seat; wear

the available seat belt properly; and sit as

far as possible from the airbag module,

while still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel

hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot

for several minutes after deployment, so

do not touch! The airbags inflate only

once. The windshield may be damaged by

absorbing some of the force of the inflat-

ing airbag.

CAUTION

The SRS airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the prima-

ry protection of the driver side and

front passenger side seat belt sys-

tems. The front seat occupants can

be killed or seriously injured by the

inflating airbags if they do not wear

the available seat belts properly.

During sudden braking just before

a collision, an unrestrained driver

or front passenger can move for-

ward into direct contact with or

close proximity to the airbag which

may then deploy during the colli-

sion. To ensure maximum protection

in an accident, the driver and all

passengers in the vehicle must

wear their seat belts properly. Wear-

ing a seat belt properly during an

accident reduces the chances of

death or serious injury or being

thrown out of the vehicle. For

instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seat belt system, see

“Seat belts” on page 50 in this Sec-

tion.

Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing front airbag. An infant or child

who is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seat of the vehicle and proper-

ly restrained. The rear seat is the

safest for infants and children. For

instructions concerning the installa-

tion of a child restraint system, see

“Child restraint” on page 73 in this

Section.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Never install a rear–facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat because the force of the

rapid inflation of the front passen-

ger airbag can cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child.

Move seat

fully back

A forward–facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the force of

the deploying front passenger air-

bag could cause death or serious

injury to the child.

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean against the door

or around the door even if the child

is seated in the child restraint sys-

tem. It is dangerous if the side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

For instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint sys-

tem, see “Child restraint” on page

73 in this Section.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean over the dashboard when

the vehicle is in use, since the

front airbags inflate with consider-

able speed and force. Otherwise

you may be killed or seriously in-

jured. Sit up straight and well back

in the seat, and always use your

seat belt properly.

Do not allow a child to stand up or

to kneel on the front passenger

seat, since the front airbag inflates

with considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

Do not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint

system in the rear seat. For instruc-

tions concerning the installation of

a child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” on page 73 in this Sec-

tion.

Do not put objects or your pets on

or in front of the dashboard or

steering wheel pad that houses the

front airbag system. They might re-

strict inflation or cause death or

serious injury as they are projected

rearward by the force of the deploy-

ing airbags. Likewise, the driver

and front passenger should not

hold objects in their arms or on

their knees.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike

or open any components such as

the steering wheel pad, steering

wheel, column cover, dashboard

near the front passenger airbag,

front passenger airbag or airbag

sensor assembly. Doing so may

cause sudden SRS front airbag

inflation or disable the system,

which could result in death or seri-

ous injury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can in-

terfere with proper operation of the

SRS front airbag system in some

cases.



Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two–way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player



Modification of the suspension sys-

tem



Modification of the front end struc-

ture



Attachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end



Repairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure, con-

sole, steering column, steering

wheel or dashboard near the front

passenger airbag

This SRS front airbag system has a ser-

vice reminder indicator to inform the driver

of operating problems. If either of the fol-

lowing conditions occurs, this indicates a

malfunction of the airbags. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to ser-

vice the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or the light remains on.

The light comes on while driving.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

The SRS front airbags have been in-

flated.

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS front airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel

or dashboard (shaded in the illustra-

tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags are designed to provide further

protection for the driver, front passen-

ger and rear outside passengers in

addition to the primary safety protec-

tion provided by the seat belts.

SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

In response to a severe side impact, the

SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags work with the seat belts to help

reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side

airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to

the driver’s or front passenger’s chest and

the SRS curtain shield airbags help to

reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, front

passenger’s or rear outside passenger’s

head. The SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag on the passenger side are

activated even with no passenger in the

front seat or rear seat.

The curtain shield airbags may activate

even when the side airbags are not acti-

vated.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seat belt restraint

system by the driver and front passenger

when the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags inflate with considerable

force. To avoid potential death or se-

rious injury when they inflate, the

driver, front passenger and rear out-

side passengers must:

Wear their seat belts properly.

Remain properly seated with their

back upright and against the seat at

all times.

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, inflators, warning light, inter-

connecting wiring and power sources. (For

details, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 117 in Sec-

tion 1–5.)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system may not inflate if the

vehicle is subjected to a collision from

the side at certain angles, or a collision

to the side of the vehicle body other

than the passenger compartment as

shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags are designed to inflate when the

passenger compartment area suffers a se-

vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

Collision from the front

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags are not designed to inflate if

the vehicle is involved in a front or

rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is

involved in a low–speed side collision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system consists mainly of the fol-

lowing components, and their locations are

shown in the illustration.

1. SRS warning light

2. Curtain shield airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

3. Side airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

4. Curtain shield airbag sensors

5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

6. Airbag sensor assembly

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system is controlled by the airbag

sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-

sembly consists of a safing sensor and

airbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side and

curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the

curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the

side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflat-

ors and/or the curtain shield airbag inflat-

ors. At this time a chemical reaction in

the inflators quickly fills the airbags with

non–toxic gas to help restrain the lateral

motion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

fairly loud noise and release some smoke

and residue along with non–toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-

mally harmless; however, for those who

have delicate skin, it may cause a minor

skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any

residue as soon as possible to prevent

any potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, it may also cause minor burns or

abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the front

pillar, and roof side may be hot for sever-

al minutes, but the airbags themselves will

not be hot. The airbags are designed to

inflate only once.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the prima-

ry protection of the driver side, and

front and rear outside passenger

side seat belt systems. To ensure

maximum protection in an accident,

the driver and all passengers in the

vehicle must wear their seat belts.

Wearing a seat belt during an acci-

dent reduces the chances of death

or serious injury or being thrown

out of the vehicle. For instructions

and precautions concerning the seat

belt system, see “Seat belts” on

page 50 in this Section.

Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by a deploying

airbag. An infant or child who is

too small to use a seat belt should

be properly secured using a child

restraint system. Toyota strongly

recommends that all infants and

children be placed in the rear seat

of the vehicle and properly re-

strained. The rear seat is the safest

for infants and children. For in-

structions concerning the installa-

tion of a child restraint system, see

“Child restraint” on page 73 in this

Section.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not allow a child to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body

against the front door or the area

of the seat, front pillar or roof side

from which the side airbag and cur-

tain shield airbag deploy even if he/

she is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

For instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint sys-

tem, see “Child restraint” on page

73 in this Section. Do not lean against the door when

the vehicle is in use, since the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate with considerable speed and

force. Otherwise, you may be killed

or seriously injured. Special care

should be taken especially when

you have a small child in the ve-

hicle.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight evenly

in the seat. Do not apply excessive

weight to the outer side of the front

seats with a side airbag, and to the

front pillar, rear pillar and roof side

rail with a curtain shield airbag.

Do not get your head closer to the

area where the side airbag and cur-

tain shield airbag inflate, since

these airbags inflate with consider-

able speed and force. Otherwise,

you may be killed or seriously in-

jured. Special care should be taken

especially when you have a small

child in the vehicle.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not allow a child to kneel on the

passenger seat facing the passen-

ger’s side door, since the side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

Do not attach a cup holder or any

other device or object on or around

the door. When the side airbag in-

flates, the cup holder or any other

device or object will be thrown with

great force or the side airbag may

not activate correctly, resulting in

death or serious injury. Likewise,

the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

Do not attach a microphone or any

other device or object around the

part where the curtain shield airbag

activates such as on the windshield

glass, side door glass, front and

side pillars, roof side and assist

grips. When the curtain shield air-

bag inflates, the microphone or oth-

er device or object will be thrown

with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat

hook. If the curtain shield airbag

inflates, those items will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly. When you hang clothes,

hang them on the coat hook direct-

ly.

Do not use seat accessories which

cover the parts where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of front seats with

side airbags. Such changes may

disable the system or cause the

side airbags to inflate accidentally,

resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not disassemble or repair the

front pillar and roof side rail con-

taining the curtain shield airbags.

Such changes may disable the sys-

tem or cause the curtain shield air-

bags to inflate accidentally, result-

ing in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system in some cases.



Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two–way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player



Modification of the suspension sys-

tem



Modification of the side structure of

the passenger compartment



Repairs made on or near the con-

sole

This SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system has a service reminder

indicator to inform the driver of operating

problems. If either of the following

conditions occurs, this indicates a

malfunction of the airbags. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or the light remains on.

The light comes on or flashes while

driving.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

The SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags have been inflated.

The portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags to inflate.

The surface of the seats with the side

airbag (shaded in the illustration) is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

The portion of the front pillars and roof

side rail garnishes (padding) containing

the curtain shield airbags inside

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Toyota strongly urges the use of child

restraint systems for children small

enough to use them.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.

and Canada now require the use of a

child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on

page 50 in this Section for details.

Child restraint—

—Child restraint precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

For effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a

child must be properly restrained,

using a seat belt or child restraint

system depending on the age and

size of the child. Holding a child in

your arms is not a substitute for a

child restraint system. In an acci-

dent, the child can be crushed

against the windshield, or between

you and the vehicle’s interior.

Toyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child,

and is put on the rear seat. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, the child

is safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat.

Never install a rear–facing child re-

straint system on the front seat. In

the event of an accident, the force

of the rapid inflation of the airbag

can cause death or serious injury if

a rear–facing child restraint system

is installed on the front seat.

A forward–facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the force of

the deploying front passenger air-

bag could cause death or serious

injury to the child.

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean against the door

or around the door even if the child

is seated in the child restraint sys-

tem. It is dangerous if the side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

Make sure that you have complied

with all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint

manufacturer and that the system is

properly secured.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

A child restraint system for a small

child or baby must itself be properly

restrained on the seat with the lap por-

tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must

carefully consult the manufacturer’s

instructions which accompany the child

restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child

restraint system following the manufactur-

er’s instructions about the appropriate age

and size of the child for the child restraint

system.

Install the child restraint system correctly

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer of the system. General

directions are also provided under the fol-

lowing illustrations.

The child restraint system should be

installed on the rear seat. According to

accident statistics, the child is safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat.

CAUTION

Never install a rear–facing child re-

straint system on the front seat. In

the event of an accident, the force

of the rapid inflation of the airbag

can cause death or serious injury if

a rear–facing child restraint system

is installed on the front seat.

A forward–facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the force of

the deploying front passenger air-

bag could cause death or serious

injury to the child.

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean against the door

or around the door even if the child

is seated in the child restraint sys-

tem. It is dangerous if the side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

After installing the child restraint

system, make sure it is secured in

place following the manufacturer’s

instructions. If it is not restrained

securely, it may cause death or se-

rious injury to the child in the

event of a sudden stop or accident.

When not using the child restraint system,

keep it secured with the seat belt or place

it somewhere other than the passenger

compartment. This will prevent it from in-

juring passengers in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

—Child restraint system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Child restraint systems are classified into

the following 3 types depending on the

child’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

Install the child restraint system following

the instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-

curing the top strap of a child restraint

system.

For instructions about how to use the an-

chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on

page 86 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-

proved for your vehicle may also be used.

See “—Installation with child restraint low-

er anchorages” on page 88 in this Sec-

tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Types of child restraint

system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat is used in rear–facing

position only.

CAUTION

Never install a rear–facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat because the force of the

rapid inflation of the front passen-

ger airbag can cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child.

Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. This can cause death or

serious injury to the child and front

passenger in case of sudden brak-

ing or a collision.

If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

—Installation with seat belt

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the infant seat following the

instructions provided by its manufactur-

er and insert the tab into the buckle

taking care not to twist the belt. Keep

the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from injury. Contact your

Toyota dealer immediately. Do not

use the child restraint system until

the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make

sure the belt is in the lock mode before

letting the belt retract.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly

against the seat cushion and seatback,

let the shoulder belt retract as far as

it will go to hold the infant seat secure-

ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the

buckle–release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat is used in forward–

facing and rear–facing position depend-

ing on the child’s age and size. When

installing, follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions about the applicable child’s

age and size as well as directions for

installing a child restraint system.

CAUTION

Never install a rear–facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat because the force of the

rapid inflation of the front passen-

ger airbag can cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child.

Move seat

fully back

A forward–facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the force of

the deploying front passenger air-

bag could cause death or serious

injury to the child.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean against the door

or around the door even if the child

is seated in the child restraint sys-

tem. It is dangerous if the side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. This can cause death or

serious injury to the child and front

passenger in case of sudden brak-

ing or a collision.

If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the convertible seat following

the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from injury. Contact your

Toyota dealer immediately. Do not

use the child restraint system until

the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted slightly, it cannot be ex-

tended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

4. To remove the convertible seat, press

the buckle–release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

A booster seat is used in forward–fac-

ing position only.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Move seat

fully back

CAUTION

A forward–facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the force of

the deploying front passenger air-

bag could cause death or serious

injury to the child.

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean against the door

or around the door even if the child

is seated in the child restraint sys-

tem. It is dangerous if the side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run

the lap and shoulder belt through or

around the booster seat and child fol-

lowing the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly

across the child’s shoulder and that the

lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page

50 in this Section for details.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder. Fail-

ure to do so could reduce the

amount of protection in an accident

and cause serious injuries in a col-

lision.

Both high–positioned lap belts and

loose–fitting belts could cause seri-

ous injuries due to sliding under

the lap belt during a collision or

other unintended result. Keep the

lap belt positioned as low on a

child’s hips as possible.

For child’s safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under child’s arm.

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from injury. Contact your

Toyota dealer immediately. Do not

use the child restraint seat until the

seat belt is fixed.

2. To remove the child restraint system,

press the buckle–release button and al-

low the belt to retract.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the rear

seatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

rear seating position.

This symbol indicates the location of the

anchor brackets.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

—Using a top strap

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Raise the anchor bracket. 3. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 73 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

4. Replace the head restraint.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Lower the anchor bracket when it is not

in use. Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-

ance between the seat cushion and seat-

back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle. Canada only

Type A

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Canada only

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system

indicates the presence of a lower connec-

tor system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Widen the clearance between the

seat cushion and seatback a little

and confirm the position of the low-

er anchorages around the tag on the

seat cushion.

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto

the anchorages and tighten the lower

straps.

Type B—

1. Widen the clearance between the

seat cushion and seatback a little

and confirm the position of the low-

er anchorages around the tag on the

seat cushion.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor-

ages.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” on page 86 in this Section.)

For the installation details, refer to the

instruction manual equipped with each

product.

CAUTION

When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. This can cause death or

serious injury to the child and front

passenger in case of sudden brak-

ing or a collision.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To change the steering wheel angle,

hold the steering wheel, pull the lock

release lever toward you, tilt the steer-

ing wheel to the desired angle and re-

lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-

tion, it will spring up as you release the

lock release lever.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make

sure it is locked in position.

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL

TILT

To change the steering wheel angle,

hold the steering wheel, pull the lock

release lever toward you, tilt the steer-

ing wheel to the desired angle and re-

lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-

tion, it will spring up as you release the

lock release lever.

Tilt steering wheel Tilt and telescopic steering

wheel

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC

STEERING COLUMN

To change the steering wheel length,

push down the lock release lever, set

the steering wheel to the desired length

and return the lever to its original posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down or for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the side of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-

tance of any object seen in the outside

rear view mirror on the passenger’s side

because it is a convex mirror. Any object

seen in a convex mirror will look smaller

and farther away than when seen in a flat

mirror.

On some models, when you push the

back window defogger switch, the heater

panels in the outside rear view mirrors will

quickly clear the surface. (See “Back win-

dow and outside rear view mirror defog-

gers” on page 110 in Section 1–4.)

Outside rear view mirrors—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

On some models, the outside rear view

mirrors are rain clearing mirrors that clear

the driver’s rear view when it rains. (For

details, see “Rain clearing mirrors” on

page 307 in Section 5.)

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the

vehicle and an accident may occur

resulting in death or serious inju-

ries.

On some models, since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the defogger switch is

on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to

be adjusted

Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”

(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mir-

ror Push the switch in the desired

direction.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is

in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not

operate the control or scrape the mir-

ror face. Use a spray de–icer to free

the mirror.

—Power rear view mirror

control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The rear view mirrors can be folded

backward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-

ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded

backward. Both the driver and pas-

senger side rear view mirrors must

be extended and properly adjusted

before driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving, operate the lever on the lower

edge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater

clarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also

lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

—Folding rear view mirrors Anti–glare inside rear view

mirror

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti–

glare function. The function is designed

to reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving.

When the ignition key is inserted and

turned on, the inside rear view mirror al-

ways turns on in the automatic function

mode.

The indicator illuminates to show you that

the function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirror

detects light from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, the mirror surface

darkens slightly to reduce the reflected

light.

To turn off the automatic function, push

the “MIRROR” switch.

To turn on the automatic function again,

push the “MIRROR” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rear

view is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, it

may take little longer for the mirror to

darken in response to the detection of

headlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of an

anti–glare mirror sensor located on the

back side of the mirror, do not touch

or cover the sensor with your finger or

a piece of cloth, etc.

Auto anti–glare inside rear

view mirror

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Rear side–view mirrors are useful as a

secondary means of checking the area

to the rear of the vehicle.

Carefully check the area to the rear of the

vehicle by either looking directly or using

both outside and inside rear view mirrors.

Type A

Type B

Rear side–view mirrors Sun visors—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swing

down the main sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swing

down the main sun visor, remove it from

the hook and swing it to the lateral side

(position 2).

Type A—If glare comes from obliquely be-

hind you, extend the plate at the end of

the visor (to position 3).

Type B—If glare comes from obliquely be-

hind you, slide the main sun visor back-

ward (to position 3). To block the glare from the front when the

main sun visor is swung to the lateral

side, swing down the sub visor.

CAUTION

Type A—Do not extend the plate at

the end of the sun visor when the

visor is in the position 1. It can

cover the anti–glare inside rear

view mirror and obstruct the rear

view.

Type B—Slide the main sun visor

only when it is swung down to the

lateral side. It can cover the anti–

glare inside rear view mirror and

obstruct the rear view.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Type A

Type B

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down

the main sun visor and slide the cover.

Type A—

The vanity light comes on when you slide

the cover.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the key is removed for 30 minutes or

more.

—Vanity mirrors

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Lights, Wipers and Defogger

Headlights and turn signals 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency flashers 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel light control 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front fog lights 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior light 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal lights 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage compartment light 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition switch light 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Running board lights 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wipers and washer 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back window wiper and washer 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 110. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

100

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,

side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all

of the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-

ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2

to turn on the headlights if they are need-

ed immediately when entering a dark tun-

nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is on

the top of the driver’s side instrument

panel.

Do not place anything on the instrument

panel, and/or do not affix anything on the

windshield to block this sensor.

The operating condition or sensitivity can

be changed. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the tail

lights on—

The lights automatically turn off when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30

seconds when all the side doors and back

door are closed with the ignition key in

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re-

mote control transmitter is pushed twice

simultaneously, the lights automatically

turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off

can be changed. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

If the driver’s door is kept opened, the

lights automatically turn off after 30 min-

utes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the

“ON” position or actuate the headlight

switch.

If you are going to park for over one

week, make sure the headlight switch is

off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

for a long period when the engine is

not running.

Headlights and turn signals

(with automatic light control

system)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

101

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all

models sold in Canada and some mod-

els sold in U.S.A.)

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system can

make it easier for others to see the front

of your vehicle during the day. The DRL

system can be helpful in many different

driving conditions, but they can be espe-

cially helpful in the short periods after

dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn

signal lights come on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run-

ning.

The knob is in the “OFF” position,

position 1 or position 3 with the tail

lights on.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob

to the position 2 or position 3 with the

headlights on, or turn the ignition switch

off.

This DRL system can be disabled. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

High–Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

with the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signal

lights are on during daytime running light

system is on. For details, see “Daytime

running light system”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

102

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out.

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,

side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1—

The lights automatically turn off when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2—

The lights automatically turn off after 30

seconds when all the side doors and back

door are closed with the ignition key in

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re-

mote control transmitter is pushed twice

simultaneously, the lights automatically

turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off

can be changed. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

If the driver’s door is kept opened, the

lights automatically turn off after 30 min-

utes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the

“ON” position or actuate the headlight

switch.

If you are going to park for over one

week, make sure the headlight switch is

off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

for a long period when the engine is

not running.

Headlights and turn signals

(without automatic light

control system)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

103

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all

models sold in Canada and some mod-

els sold in U.S.A.)

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system can

make it easier for others to see the front

of your vehicle during the day. The DRL

system can be helpful in many different

driving conditions, but they can be espe-

cially helpful in the short periods after

dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn

signal lights come on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run-

ning.

The knob is in the “OFF” position or

position 1.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob

to the position 2 or turn the ignition switch

off.

This DRL system can be disabled. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

High–Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

with the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signal

lights are on during daytime running light

system is on. For details, see “Daytime

running light system”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

104

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out.

To turn on the emergency flashers,

push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn

them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn

other drivers if your vehicle must be

stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-

sible.

The turn signal light switch will not work

when the emergency flashers are operat-

ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the switch on

longer than necessary when the en-

gine is not running.

Emergency flashers

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

105

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To adjust the brightness of the instru-

ment panel lights, turn the dial. To turn on the front fog lights, twist

the band of the headlight and turn sig-

nal switch lever. They will come on

only when the headlights are on low

beam.

Without rear seat audio system

With rear seat audio system

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights Interior light

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

106

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To turn on the interior light, slide the

switch.

The interior light switch has the following

positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the side doors and back door is opened.

The light goes off when all the side doors

and back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch is

in the “DOOR” position and any of the

side doors and back door is opened, the

light will come on. After all the side doors

and back door are closed, the light re-

mains on for about 15 seconds before

fading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When the

switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the

ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the

light will come on. The light remains on

for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed when the ignition key is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

light will come on and remain on for about

15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless

remote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at “DOOR” position

for 30 minutes or more.

To turn on the personal lights, push the

lens. To turn the lights off, push the

lens once again.

Personal lights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

107

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To turn on the luggage compartment

light, slide the switch.

The luggage compartment light switch has

the following positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the side doors and back door is opened.

The light goes off when all the side doors

and back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch is

in the “DOOR” position and any of the

side doors and back door is opened, the

light will come on. After all the side doors

and back door are closed, the light re-

mains on for about 15 seconds before

fading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When the

switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the

ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the

light will come on. The light remains on

for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed when the ignition key is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

light will come on and remain on for about

15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless

remote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at “DOOR” position

for 30 minutes or more.

Luggage compartment light

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

108

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

For easy access to the ignition switch,

the ignition switch light comes on when

any of the side doors and back door is

opened or when the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK” position.

The light remains on for about 15 seconds

after all the side doors and back door are

closed.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed when the ignition key is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

light will come on and remain on for about

15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless

remote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened for 30 minutes or more.

Lighting the running boards and the

ground helps you easily to get in and

out of the vehicle in the night. The

lights come on when any of the side

doors is opened.

The lights remain on for about 15 seconds

after all the side doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the light

go off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

The vehicle speed reaches 8 km/h (5

mph) or higher.

Ignition switch light Running board lights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

109

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

lights will come on and remain on for

about 15 seconds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened for 30 minutes or more.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move

the lever to the desired setting.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust the

wiping time interval when the wiper lever

is in the intermittent position (position 1).

Twist the band upward to increase the

time between sweeps, and downward to

decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever

toward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will

operate a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 in

Section 7–3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield

with the defroster before using the washer.

This will help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing on your windshield, which

can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-

shield is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

Windshield wipers and washer

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

110

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To turn on the back window wiper, twist

the lever knob upward.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the back window,

twist the knob upward or downward as far

as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob

automatically returns from these positions

after you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 in

Section 7–3.

If the back window is not fully closed, the

back window wiper and washer will not

work. Make sure the back window is fully

closed when using the back window wiper

and washer.

NOTICE

Do not operate the back window wip-

er if the back window is dry. It may

scratch the glass.

To defog or defrost the back window,

push the switch with the back window

closed.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the

back window will quickly clear the surface.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

the defogger is operating.

On some models, heater panels in the

outside rear view mirrors will also quickly

clear the surfaces.

Push the switch once again to turn the

defoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the defoggers have operated about 15

minutes.

Back window wiper and

washer Back window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

111

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the back window is not fully closed, the

back window defogger will not work. Make

sure the back window is fully closed when

using the back window defogger.

If the back window is opened while the

defogger is working, the defogger will au-

tomatically turn off. Even if the back win-

dow is fully closed after that, the defogger

will not automatically turn on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers off

when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the

defoggers on for a long time could cause

the battery to discharge, especially during

stop–and–go driving. The defoggers are

not designed for drying rain water or for

melting snow.

CAUTION

On some models, since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the defogger switch is on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the back

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires or connec-

tors.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

112

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

113

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine coolant temperature gauge 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and two trip meters 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

114

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Low fuel level

warning light

The gauge indicates the approximate

quantity of the fuel remaining in the

tank when the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”

Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over

1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-

ating or making turns. This is caused by

the movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low

fuel level warning light comes on, fill the

fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge

needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill

the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle

of the fuel gauge returns to “E” when the

ignition switch is turned to the “START”

position.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature when the ignition switch is

on. The engine operating temperature

will vary with changes in weather and

engine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,

your engine is too hot. If your vehicle

overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the

engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe

operating conditions, such as:

Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

Reducing speed or stopping after high

speed driving.

Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature

gauge

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

115

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Idling for a long period with the air

conditioning on in stop–and–go traffic.

Towing a trailer.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle

of the engine coolant temperature gauge

returns to “C” when the ignition switch is

turned to the “START” position.

NOTICE



Do not remove the thermostat in

the engine cooling system as this

may cause the engine to overheat.

The thermostat is designed to con-

trol the flow of coolant to keep the

temperature of the engine within

the specified operating range.



Do not continue driving with an

overheated engine. See “If your ve-

hicle overheats” on page 282 in

Section 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speed

in thousands of rpm (revolutions per

minute). Use it while driving to select

correct shift points and to prevent en-

gine lugging and over–revving.

Driving with the engine running too fast

causes excessive engine wear and poor

fuel economy. Remember, in most cases

the slower the engine speed, the greater

the fuel economy.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle

of the tachometer returns to the bottom

position when the ignition switch is turned

to the “START” position.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get

into the red zone. This may cause

severe engine damage.

Tachometer

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

116

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This meter displays the odometer and

two trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two different

distances independently driven since

the last time each trip meter was set

to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate

the fuel economy and the other to

measure the distance on each trip. All

trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-

trical power source is disconnected.

3. Odometer/two trip meter changeover

button—Switches the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly

push and release the changeover but-

ton. The meter display changes in the

order from the odometer to trip meter

A to trip meter B, then back to the

odometer each time you push.

4. Trip meter reset button—Resets the

two trip meters to zero.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-

play the meter A reading, then push

and hold the button until the meter is

set to zero. The same process can be

applied for resetting the trip meter B.

Odometer and two trip meters

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

117

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) (indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

118

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(h) Replace engine oil.

(i) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop

immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all side doors and back door.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m) Stop and check.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

119

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(n) Add washer fluid.

(o) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

120

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and

Buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases

when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-

tion.

When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few seconds

when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position on even after the parking

brake is released.

When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving

normally when the brake fluid level is

low.

When the hydraulic brake booster

fails...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem

resulting in poor braking performance, the

warning light comes on and buzzer sounds

continuously.

Have your vehicle checked at your

Toyota dealer in the following cases:

The light does not come on even if the

parking brake is applied when the igni-

tion key is in the “ON” position.

The light does not come on even if the

ignition key is turned on with the park-

ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-

curs, immediately stop your vehicle at

a safe place and contact your Toyota

dealer.

The light does not turn off even

after the parking brake is released

while the engine is running.

The warning buzzer comes on to-

gether with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate that

the brakes may not work properly

and your stopping distance will be-

come longer. Depress the brake

pedal firmly and bring the vehicle

to an immediate stop.

The brake system warning light re-

mains on together with the “ABS”

warning light.

In this case, not only the anti–lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely un-

stable during braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc-

cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-

tion:

The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the warning light and

buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off

and the buzzer stops sounding after a

few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the

engine compartment after the engine is

started or the brake pedal is depressed

repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating

sound of the brake system, and it is

not a malfunction.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

121

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

and Buzzer

This light and buzzer remind you to

buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or

“START”, the reminder light flashes and

buzzer come on if the driver’s seat belt

is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens

the belt, the light keeps on flashing and

the buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 se-

conds.

Reminder Light

This light reminds you to buckle up the

front passenger’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or

“START”, the reminder light flashes if a

passenger sits in the front passenger seat

and does not fasten the seat belt. Howev-

er, if a front passenger uses an additional

seat cushion, the light may not flash even

when the seat belt is not buckled up.

If luggage or other load is placed on the

front passenger seat, depending on its

weight and how it is placed on the seat,

built–in sensors in the seat cushion may

detect the pressure, causing the reminder

light to come on.

(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is being

discharged.

If it comes on while you are driving, there

is a problem somewhere in the charging

system.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-

ate, however, until the battery is dis-

charged. Turn off the air conditioning,

blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to

the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the engine

drive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning

Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres-

sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are

driving, pull off the road to a safe place

and stop the engine immediately. Call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when

the engine is idling or it may come on

briefly after a hard stop. There is no

cause for concern if it then goes out when

the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level

is extremely low. It is not designed to

indicate low oil level, and the oil level

must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the

warning light on—even for one block.

It may ruin the engine.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

122

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignition

key is turned to the “ON” position and

goes off after the engine starts. This

means that the warning light system is

operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp

comes on while driving, first check the

followings.

Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-

ately.

Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely

tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp will not go off even after the

several trips, contact your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel

tank cap is not loose...

There is a problem somewhere in the

engine, emission control system, elec-

tronic throttle control system, automatic

transmission electrical system or warn-

ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

If the engine speed does not increase with

the accelerator pedal depressed down,

there may be a problem somewhere in

your electronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

Emissions inspection and maintenance

(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state

emission inspection if the malfunction

indicator lamp remains on. Contact your

Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s

emission control system and OBD

(On–Board Diagnostics) system before

taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 314

in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level

in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up

the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

(h) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder

Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light reminds you when to replace

the engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignition

key is turned to “ON” and will go off after

about a few seconds.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

123

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When you drive for about 8000 km (5000

miles) after the engine oil replacement,

this light illuminates for about 3 seconds

and then flashes for about 12 seconds

with the ignition key turned to “ON” posi-

tion. If you continue driving without the

engine oil replacement, and if the driving

range exceeds 12000 km (7500 miles), the

light will come on after the ignition key is

turned to “ON” position. The light will re-

main on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend that

you replace the engine oil at an early

opportunity depending on the driving and

road condition. If the light comes on, re-

place it as soon as possible.

You need to reset the light after the en-

gine oil replacement. Reset the light by

following the procedure below:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “OFF” posi-

tion with the odometer reading shown.

(For details, see “Odometer and two

trip meters” on page 116 in this Sec-

tion.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-

tion while holding down the trip meter

reset button.

Hold down the button until the light goes

off. Before the light goes off, it illuminates

for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds and

illuminates for 1 second.

If the system fails to reset, the light will

remain flashing.

(i) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–

lock brake system and the brake assist

system work properly, the light turns off

after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either

of the systems malfunctions, the light

comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

Anti–lock brake system

Brake assist system

Traction control system

(two–wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Hill–start assist control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti–lock brake system does not operate,

so that the wheels will lock up during a

sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc-

curs, this indicates a malfunction some-

where in the components monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are dri-

ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

124

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti–lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may

occur, but do not indicate a malfunc-

tion:

The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

turns off after a few seconds.

(j) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

Vehicle stability control system

Traction control system

(two–wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Hill–start assist control system

The light will come on when the ignition

key turned to “ON”, and will go off after

a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the lights. It is normal if they

go out after a few seconds.

There is no problem when the “VSC

TRAC” warning light comes on when the

brake actuator temperature becomes high.

If the light comes on while driving, the

above mentioned systems do not work.

However, as conventional braking operates

when applied, there is no problem to con-

tinue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come

on when the “VSC TRAC” warning light

comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch

is not pushed.

(k) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the side

doors and back door are completely

closed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

125

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(l) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

After about 6 seconds, the light will go

off. This means the system of the air-

bag and front seat belt pretensioner are

operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, inflators, warning light, inter-

connecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction somewhere in

the parts monitored by the warning light

system. Contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on.

The light comes on or flashes while

driving.

(m) Automatic Transmission Fluid

Temperature Warning Light

This light warns that the automatic trans-

mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-

ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop

the vehicle at a safe place and put the

selector lever in “P”. With the engine id-

ling, wait until the light goes off. If the

light goes off, you may start the vehicle

again. If the light does not go off, call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warning

light on may damage the automatic

transmission.

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level

Warning Light (for vehicles sold in

Canada)

The light warns that the windshield washer

fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at

your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 in

Section 7–3.)

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove the

key when you open the driver’s door with

the ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”

position.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

126

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER

INDICATORS (except the low fuel level

warning light and low windshield

washer fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or back

door.

The open door warning light should

come on.

3. Close the door.

The open door warning light should go

off.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but do

not start the engine.

All the service reminder indicators ex-

cept the open door warning light should

come on.

The following service reminder indica-

tors go off after a few seconds:

Engine oil replacement reminder light

“ABS” warning light

“VSC TRAC” warning light

“TRAC OFF” indicator light

(two–wheel drive models)

“VSC OFF” indicator light

(four–wheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Height control indicator lights

Height control “OFF” indicator light

Downhill assist control system indicator

light (four–wheel drive models)

The SRS warning light goes off after

about 6 seconds.

There may be the case that the “ABS”

warning light (brake assist system

warning light), “VSC TRAC” warning

light and “TRAC OFF” (two–wheel drive

models) or “VSC OFF” (four–wheel

drive models) indicator light stay on for

about 60 seconds after the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. It is

normal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-

ing buzzer does not function as described

above, have it checked by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

127

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake

Ignition switch with steering lock 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic transmission 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four–wheel drive system 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Traction control system 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Active traction control system 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle stability control system 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downhill assist control system 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hill–start assist control system 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear height control air suspension 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking brake 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise control 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

128

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“START”—Starter motor on. The key

will return to the “ON” position when

released.

For starting tips, see page 259 in Section

It is not a malfunction even if the needle

of the tachometer, fuel gauge or engine

coolant temperature gauge returns to the

bottom position when the ignition switch is

turned to the “START” position.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessories

on.

This is the normal driving position.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle

on the speedometer may move when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio

operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position and open the driver’s

door, a buzzer will remind you to remove

the key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering

wheel is locked. The key can be re-

moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from

“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selec-

tor lever must be in the “P” position be-

fore pushing the key.

Once you remove the key, the engine im-

mobiliser system is automatically set. (See

“Engine immobiliser system” on page 12

in Section 1–2.)

When starting the engine, the key may

seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To

free it, first be sure the key is pushed all

the way in, and then rock the steering

wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”

position if the engine is not running.

The battery will discharge and the

ignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steering

lock

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

129

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition

switch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and

key removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

(shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking

(shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission (5–speed)

With the brake pedal depressed

(The ignition switch must be in

“ON” position.)

Shift normally.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

130

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 260 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

“P” or “N”.

When the four–wheel drive control switch

knob is in “L4” (low–speed position, center

differential locked), the driving pattern se-

lector setting has no effect on gear shift

timing. (See “Four–wheel drive system

(full–time four–wheel drive models)” on

page 138 in this Section for information of

the four–wheel drive control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low or when the

four–wheel drive control switch knob is in

“L4” (low–speed position, center differential

locked), the transmission will not shift into

the overdrive gear even in the “D” posi-

tion. (See “Four–wheel drive system (full–

time four–wheel drive models)” on page

138 in this Section for information of the

four–wheel drive control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linked

with the shift position is set, all the side

doors and back door are automatically

locked when the shift lever is moved out

of the “P” position with the engine running

(including ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion) and all the side doors and back door

are closed. For details, see “—Automatic

door locking and unlocking functions” on

page 17 in Section 1–2.

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

Shift into the “4” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to fourth gear

and engine braking will be enabled.

Shift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two–wheel drive models

133 km/h (83 mph)

Four–wheel drive models

Four–wheel drive control switch

knob at “H4” 133 km/h (83 mph)

Four–wheel drive control switch

knob at “L4” 52 km/h (32 mph)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

131

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Shift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two–wheel drive models

90 km/h (56 mph)

Four–wheel drive models

Four–wheel drive control switch

knob at “H4” 90 km/h (56 mph)

Four–wheel drive control switch

knob at “L4” 35 km/h (22 mph)

Shift into the “L” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

maximum engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two–wheel drive models

47 km/h (29 mph)

Four–wheel drive models

Four–wheel drive control switch

knob at “H4” 47 km/h (29 mph)

Four–wheel drive control switch

knob at “L4” 18 km/h (11 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,

even if you downshift from “D” to “4”,

engine braking will not be enabled be-

cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,

see “Cruise control” on page 164 in this

Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. Abrupt shifting

could cause the vehicle to spin or

skid.

(d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for

strong engine braking as described pre-

viously.

With the selector lever in ”3”, “2” or “L”,

you can start the vehicle in motion as

with the lever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the

vehicle will start in first gear and automat-

ically shift to third gear or second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-

mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE



Be careful not to over–rev the en-

gine. Watch the tachometer to keep

engine rpm from going into the red

zone. The approximate maximum al-

lowable speed for each position is

given below for your reference:

Two–wheel drive models

“3” 136 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . .

“2” 93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . .

“L” 54 km/h (33 mph). . . . . . . .

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

132

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Four–wheel drive models

Four–wheel drive control switch

knob at “H4”

“3” 136 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . .

“2” 93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . .

“L” 54 km/h (33 mph). . . . . . . .

Four–wheel drive control switch

knob at “L4”

“3” 53 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . .

“2” 36 km/h (22 mph). . . . . . . .

“L” 21 km/h (13 mph). . . . . . . .



Do not continue hill climbing or

hard towing for a long time in the

“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may

cause severe automatic transmis-

sion damage from overheating. To

prevent such damage, “4” position

should be used in hill climbing or

hard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into “P” position under any cir-

cumstances while the vehicle is mov-

ing. Serious mechanical damage and

loss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linked

with the shift position is set, all the side

doors and back door are automatically un-

locked when the selector lever is moved

to the “P” position with the ignition switch

is in the “ON” position. For details, see

“—Automatic door locking and unlocking

functions” on page 17 in Section 1–2.

(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between fourth gear and

overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever to the “4” posi-

tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever

to the “D” position immediately after-

ward.

When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use “D” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

133

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 298 in Section 4.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

134

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition

switch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and

key removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

(shifting into overdrive possible)

3: Engine braking

(shifting into overdrive not possible)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission (4–speed)

With the brake pedal depressed

(The ignition switch must be in

“ON” position.)

Shift normally.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

135

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 260 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

“P” or “N”.

When the multi–mode control switch knob

is in “L4” (low–speed position, four–wheel

drive, center differential locked), the driv-

ing pattern selector setting has no effect

on gear shift timing. (See “Four–wheel

drive system (multi–mode four–wheel drive

models)” on page 141 in this Section for

information of the multi–mode control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low or when the

multi–mode control switch knob is in “L4”

(low–speed position, four–wheel drive,

center differential locked), the transmission

will not shift into the overdrive gear even

in the “D” position. (See “Four–wheel drive

system (multi–mode four–wheel drive mod-

els)” on page 141 in this Section for in-

formation of the multi–mode control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linked

with the shift position is set, all the side

doors and back door are automatically

locked when the shift lever is moved out

of the “P” position with the engine running

(including ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion) and all the side doors and back door

are closed. For details, see “—Automatic

door locking and unlocking functions” on

page 17 in Section 1–2.

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

Shift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear.

Shift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two–wheel drive models

123 km/h (76 mph)

Four–wheel drive models

Multi–mode control switch knob at

“H4” 123 km/h (76 mph)

Multi–mode control switch knob at

“L4” 41 km/h (25 mph)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

136

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Shift into the “L” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

maximum engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two–wheel drive models

59 km/h (36 mph)

Four–wheel drive models

Multi–mode control switch knob at

“H4” 59 km/h (36 mph)

Multi–mode control switch knob at

“L4” 11 km/h (6 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,

even if you downshift from “D” to “3”,

engine braking will not be enabled be-

cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,

see “Cruise control” on page 164 in this

Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. Abrupt shifting

could cause the vehicle to spin or

skid.

(d) Using “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used for

strong engine braking as described pre-

viously.

With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, you

can start the vehicle in motion as with the

lever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “2”, the vehicle

will start in first gear and automatically

shift to second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-

mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE



Be careful not to over–rev the en-

gine. Watch the tachometer to keep

engine rpm from going into the red

zone. The approximate maximum al-

lowable speed for each position is

given below for your reference:

Two–wheel drive models

“2” 123 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . .

“L” 67 km/h (41 mph). . . . . . . .

Four–wheel drive models

Multi–mode control switch knob

at “H2” or “H4”

“2” 123 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . .

“L” 67 km/h (41 mph). . . . . . . .

Multi–mode control switch knob

at “L4”

“2” 48 km/h (29 mph). . . . . . . .

“L” 26 km/h (16 mph). . . . . . . .



Do not continue hill climbing or

hard towing for a long time in the

“2” or “L” position. This may cause

severe automatic transmission dam-

age from overheating. To prevent

such damage, “D” or “3” position

should be used in hill climbing or

hard towing.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

137

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into “P” position under any cir-

cumstances while the vehicle is mov-

ing. Serious mechanical damage and

loss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linked

with the shift position is set, all the side

doors and back door are automatically un-

locked when the selector lever is moved

to the “P” position with the ignition switch

is in the “ON” position. For details, see

“—Automatic door locking and unlocking

functions” on page 17 in Section 1–2.

(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between third gear and over-

drive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever to the “3” posi-

tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever

to the “D” position immediately after-

ward.

When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use “D” position. The selector lever

must be in the “3” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 298 in Section 4.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

138

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Four–wheel drive control switch knob

Center differential lock switch

Use the four–wheel drive control switch

knob and center differential lock switch

to select the transfer and center differ-

ential modes.

The “H4” and “L4” positions of the four–

wheel drive control switch knob provide

either lock or unlock mode of the center

differential depending on the center differ-

ential lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system if

your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when

you are driving on a slippery or bumpy

surface. When the center differential is

locked, the vehicle stability control system

is automatically turned off and the center

differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator

lights come on because the function that

controls engine performance interferes

with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lock

switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”

indicator light comes on. After the

wheels are out of the ditch or off the

slippery or bumpy surface, turn the

center differential lock switch off.

Make sure that the center differential

lock indicator light and vehicle stabil-

ity control system off indicator light

turn off.

“H4” (high speed position, center differ-

ential unlocked): Four–wheel drive control

switch knob at “H4”, center differential

lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on all types of

roads, from dry hard–surfaced roads to

wet, icy or snow–covered roads. This

position gives greater economy, quietest

ride, least wear and better vehicle control.

“H4” (high speed position, center differ-

ential locked): Four–wheel drive control

switch knob at “H4”, center differential

lock switch pushed in

Use this for greater traction when you

experience a loss of power, such as

wheel slipping, in the center differential

unlock mode.

Four–wheel drive system (full–time

four–wheel drive models)—

(a) Four–wheel drive control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

139

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“L4” (low speed position, center differ-

ential unlocked): Four–wheel drive control

switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock

switch left out

The “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)

indicator light comes on when the “L4”

mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use this for climbing or descending steep

hills, off–road driving, and hard pulling in

sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-

curs when the wheels are negotiating a

sharp corner is further reduced than in the

“L4” (low position, center differential

locked) mode.

“L4” (low speed position, center differ-

ential locked): Four–wheel drive control

switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock

switch pushed in

The “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)

indicator light comes on when the “L4”

mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use this for hard pulling in situations the

vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”

(low speed position, center differential un-

locked) mode. Also, using this mode when

driving down steep off–road inclines will

help contribute to increased vehicle stabil-

ity.

The indicator light tells when the differen-

tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-

ential is not still locked as long as the

indicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, the

indicator blinks. If the indicator light does

not go off when you push out the center

differential lock switch, drive straight

ahead while accelerating or decelerating,

or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op-

eration is not completed within 5 seconds

while the cruise control system is set,

cancel the cruise control system. To can-

cel the cruise control system, see “Cruise

control” on page 164 in Section 1–6.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so,

contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. There may be a trouble in the

center differential lock system.

See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further in-

structions.

Advice for driving on slippery roads in

“L4” (low speed position) mode

If the four–wheel drive control switch knob

is in the “L4” and the automatic transmis-

sion selector lever is in the “2” or “3”

when you drive in steep off–road areas,

the output of the brake can be controlled

effectively by the active traction control

system, which assists the driver to control

the driving power of 4 wheels.

Use the “L” position of the automatic

transmission selector lever for maximum

power and traction when your wheels get

stuck or when you drive down a steep

incline. In the following cases, the output

of the brake can be controlled by the

active traction control system if the engine

speed is under 3000 rpm (normally engine

speed is under 3000 rpm when the wheels

get unstuck).

The four–wheel drive control switch

knob in the “L4” position and the auto-

matic transmission selector lever in the

“L” position

The four–wheel drive control switch

knob in the “L4” position and the auto-

matic transmission selector lever in the

“D”, “4”, “3” or “2” with the transmis-

sion downshifting to first gear

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

140

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The four–wheel drive control switch

knob in the “L4” position and the auto-

matic transmission selector lever in the

“R” position

(As for the automatic transmission selec-

tor lever positions, see “Automatic trans-

mission (5–speed)” on page 129 in this

Section.)

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED)

AND “H4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock

modes in “H4”, push the center differen-

tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED)

AND “L4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock

modes in “L4”, push the center differen-

tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”

To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop with the brake

pedal held down with your foot, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever into

“N” and push and turn the four–wheel

drive control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop with the brake

pedal held down with your foot, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever into

“N” and turn the four–wheel drive control

switch knob fully counterclockwise.

If the “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)

indicator light continues to blink when you

operate the four–wheel drive control

switch knob to the “H4” or “L4” position,

drive forward or backward in a short dis-

tance, then stop the vehicle completely,

shift the automatic transmission selector

lever securely into “N” and operate the

switch knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even if

doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible. There may be a trouble

in the four–wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the four–wheel drive

control switch knob if the wheels are

slipping. Stop the slipping or spin-

ning before operating.

(b) Shifting procedure

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

141

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Multi–mode control switch knob

Center differential lock switch

Use the multi–mode control switch

knob and center differential lock switch

to select the transfer and center differ-

ential modes.

The “H4” and “L4” positions of the multi–

mode control switch knob provide either

lock or unlock mode of the center differen-

tial depending on the center differential

lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system if

your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when

you are driving on a slippery or bumpy

surface. When the center differential is

locked, the vehicle stability control system

is automatically turned off and the center

differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator

lights come on because the function that

controls engine performance interferes

with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lock

switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”

indicator light comes on. After the

wheels are out of the ditch or off the

slippery or bumpy surface, turn the

center differential lock switch off.

Make sure that the center differential

lock indicator light and vehicle stabil-

ity control system off indicator light

turn off.

Four–wheel drive system

(multi–mode four–wheel drive

models)—

(a) Multi–mode control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

142

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“H2” (high speed position, two–wheel

drive, center differential unlocked): Mul-

ti–mode control switch knob at “H2”, cen-

ter differential lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on dry hard–

surfaced roads. This position gives greater

economy, quietest ride, least wear and

better vehicle control.

“H4” (high speed position, four–wheel

drive, center differential unlocked): Mul-

ti–mode control switch knob at “H4”, cen-

ter differential lock switch left out

The four–wheel drive indicator light comes

on when the “H4” mode is selected.

Use this for normal driving on all types of

roads, from dry hard–surfaced roads to

wet, icy or snow–covered roads. This

position provides greater traction than

two–wheel drive.

“H4” (high speed position, four–wheel

drive, center differential locked): Multi–

mode control switch knob at “H4”, center

differential lock switch pushed in

The four–wheel drive indicator light comes

on when the “H4” mode is selected.

Use this for greater traction when you

experience a loss of power, such as

wheel slipping, in the center differential

unlock mode.

“L4” (low speed position, four–wheel

drive, center differential unlocked): Mul-

ti–mode control switch knob at “L4”, cen-

ter differential lock switch left out

The four–wheel drive and “4LO” (low

speed four–wheel drive) indicator lights

come on when the “L4” mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use this for climbing or descending steep

hills, off–road driving, and hard pulling in

sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-

curs when the wheels are negotiating a

sharp corner is further reduced than in the

“L4” (low speed position, four–wheel drive,

center differential locked) mode.

“L4” (low speed position, four–wheel

drive, center differential locked): Multi–

mode control switch knob at “L4”, center

differential lock switch pushed in

The four–wheel drive and “4LO” (low

speed four–wheel drive) indicator lights

come on when the “L4” mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use this for hard pulling in situations the

vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”

(low speed position, four–wheel drive, cen-

ter differential unlocked) mode. Also, using

this mode when driving down steep off–

road inclines will help contribute to in-

creased vehicle stability.

The indicator light tells when the differen-

tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-

ential is not still locked as long as the

indicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, the

indicator blinks. If the indicator light does

not go off when you push out the center

differential lock switch, drive straight

ahead while accelerating or decelerating,

or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op-

eration is not completed within 5 seconds

while the cruise control system is set,

cancel the cruise control system. To can-

cel the cruise control system, see “Cruise

control” on page 164 in Section 1–6.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so,

contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. There may be a trouble in the

center differential lock system.

See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further in-

structions.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

143

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Advice for driving on slippery roads in

“L4” (low speed position) mode

If the multi–mode control switch knob is

in the “L4” and the automatic transmission

selector lever is in the “2” when you drive

in steep off–road areas, the output of the

brake can be controlled effectively by the

active traction control system, which as-

sists the driver to control the driving pow-

er of 4 wheels.

Use the “L” position of the automatic

transmission selector lever for maximum

power and traction when your wheels get

stuck or when you drive down a steep

incline. In the following cases, the output

of the brake can be controlled by the

active traction control system if the engine

speed is under 3000 rpm (normally engine

speed is under 3000 rpm when the wheels

get unstuck).

The multi–mode control switch knob in

the “L4” position and the automatic

transmission selector lever in the “L”

position

The multi–mode control switch knob in

the “L4” position and the automatic

transmission selector lever in the “D”,

“3” or “2” with the transmission down-

shifting to first gear

The multi–mode control switch knob in

the “L4” position and the automatic

transmission selector lever in the “R”

position

(As for the automatic transmission selec-

tor lever positions, see “Automatic trans-

mission (4–speed)” on page 134 in this

Section.)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen-

gaged by the shifting operations de-

scribed in “(c) Shifting procedure”.

You should drive in four–wheel drive for

at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.

This will assure that the front drive com-

ponents are lubricated.

(b) A.D.D.

(automatic disconnecting

differential)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

144

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H2” AND “H4”

(UNLOCKED)

To shift from “H2” to “H4” (unlocked),

reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100

km/h (62 mph) and turn the multi–mode

control switch knob fully clockwise.

If the four–wheel drive indicator light con-

tinues to blink when you operate the mul-

ti–mode control switch knob from the “H2”

to the “H4” position, this reminds you that

the transfer mode is not securely in “H4”

mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler-

ating or decelerating.

If the four–wheel drive indicator light con-

tinues to blink and the buzzer sounds

when you operate the multi–mode control

switch knob from the “H2” to the “H4”

position, this reminds you that the transfer

mode is not in “H4” mode. Stop the ve-

hicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less

than 100 km/h (62 mph). Operate the

switch knob again.

To shift from “H4” (unlocked) to “H2”,

turn the multi–mode control switch knob

fully counterclockwise.

This can be done at any speed.

If the four–wheel drive indicator light con-

tinues to blink when you operate the mul-

ti–mode control switch knob from the “H4”

to the “H2” position, this reminds you that

the transfer mode is not securely in “H2”

mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler-

ating or decelerating, or drive forward or

backward in a short distance.

If the indicator light continues to blink

even if doing so, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. There may be

a trouble in the four–wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multi–mode control

switch knob if the wheels are slip-

ping. Stop the slipping or spinning

before operating.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED)

AND “H4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock

modes in “H4”, push the center differen-

tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED)

AND “L4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock

modes in “L4”, push the center differen-

tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”

To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop with the brake

pedal held down with your foot, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever into

“N” and push and turn the multi–mode

control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop with the brake

pedal held down with your foot, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever into

“N” and turn the multi–mode control switch

knob counterclockwise.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

145

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)

indicator light continues to blink when you

operate the multi–mode control switch

knob to the “H4” or “L4” position, drive

forward or backward in a short distance,

then stop the vehicle completely, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever se-

curely into “N” and operate the switch

knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even if

doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible. There may be a trouble

in the four–wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multi–mode control

switch knob if the wheels are slip-

ping. Stop the slipping or spinning

before operating.

The traction control system automatical-

ly helps prevent the spinning of rear

wheels when the vehicle is started or

accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,

the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-

tions, full traction of the vehicle and

power to the rear wheels cannot be

maintained, even though the traction

control system is in operation. Do not

drive the vehicle under any speed or

maneuvering conditions which may

cause the vehicle to lose traction

control. In situations where the road

surface is covered with ice or snow,

your vehicle should be fitted with

snow tires or tire chains. Always

drive at an appropriate and cautious

speed for the present road condi-

tions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during ordinary

driving so that it can operate when

needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the trac-

tion control system is in the self–check

mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-

ating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the

rear wheels. At this time, the slip indi-

cator light blinks.

Traction control system

(two–wheel drive models)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

146

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

You may feel vibration or noise in your

vehicle, caused by operation of the

brakes. This indicates the system is

functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE

If your wheels get stuck in an ditch

when you are driving on a severe off

road and sand, turn off the traction

control system. This system that con-

trols engine performance may interfere

with the process of freeing your

wheels.

To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come

on.

The vehicle stability control system is al-

ways activated, even if the traction control

system is turned off.

To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch

once again.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.

The traction control system will automati-

cally go on, and the “TRAC OFF” indicator

light will go off when you drive over 30

km/h (19 mph) even if the “TRAC OFF”

switch is pushed to cancel the traction

control system.

“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on for

a few seconds when the ignition key is

turned to “ON”. It will come on again

when you push the “TRAC OFF” switch to

turn off the system.

The light may come on for 60 seconds

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It

is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the “TRAC OFF” indicator

light. It is normal if it goes out after a few

seconds.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

147

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The indicator light does not come on

when the ignition key is turned to

“ON”.

The indicator light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The indicator light comes on with the

normal driving mode while driving.

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

Traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

Hill–start assist control system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning

light will come on and will go off after a

few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the above

mentioned systems such as on slippery

roads. If the brake actuator temperature

becomes too high while any of the sys-

tems is operating, a buzzer will start to

sound intermittently to indicate that the

traction control system can no longer op-

erate. In this case, immediately stop your

vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the “VSC TRAC” warning light

will come on and the traction control sys-

tem temporarily stops operating in order to

protect the brake actuator. (Although the

traction control system does not operate,

there is no problem to continue your driv-

ing.) The system will be automatically re-

stored after a short time and the “VSC

TRAC” warning light goes out.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

148

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the light comes on while driving, the

traction control system does not work.

However, as normal braking operates

when being applied, there is no problem

to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come

on when the “VSC TRAC” warning light

comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch

is not pushed.

The active traction control system auto-

matically helps prevent the spinning of

4 wheels when the vehicle is started or

accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,

the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-

tions, full traction of the vehicle and

power to the 4 wheels cannot be

maintained, even though the traction

control system is in operation. Do not

drive the vehicle under any speed or

maneuvering conditions which may

cause the vehicle to lose traction

control. In situations where the road

surface is covered with ice or snow,

your vehicle should be fitted with

snow tires or tire chains. Always

drive at an appropriate and cautious

speed for the present road condi-

tions.

Leave the system on during the ordi-

nary driving so that it can operate

when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the ac-

tive traction control system is in the self–

check mode, but does not indicate a mal-

function.

When the active traction control system is

operating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the

4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica-

tor light blinks.

Active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

149

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

You may feel vibration or noise in your

vehicle, caused by operation of the

brakes. This indicates the system is

functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

Hill–start assist control system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning

light will come on and will go off after a

few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the above

mentioned systems such as on slippery

roads. If the brake actuator temperature

becomes too high while any of the sys-

tems is operating, a buzzer will start to

sound intermittently to indicate that the

active traction control system can no lon-

ger operate. In this case, immediately stop

your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time, the “VSC TRAC” warning light

will come on and the active traction con-

trol system temporarily stops operating in

order to protect the brake actuator. (Al-

though the active traction control system

does not operate, there is no problem to

continue your driving.) The system will be

automatically restored after a short time

and the “VSC TRAC” warning light goes

out.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

150

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the light comes on while driving, the

active traction control system does not

work. However, as normal braking oper-

ates when being applied, there is no prob-

lem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The vehicle stability control system

helps provide integrated control of the

systems such as anti–lock brake sys-

tem, traction control, engine control,

etc. This system automatically controls

the output of the brakes or engine to

help prevent the vehicle from skidding

when cornering on a slippery road sur-

face or operating steering wheel abrupt-

ly.

The vehicle stability control activates

when the vehicle speed is more than 15

km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the sys-

tem is in the self–check mode, but does

not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even

if the vehicle stability control sys-

tem is operating, you must always

drive carefully and attentively to

avoid serious injury. Reckless driv-

ing will result in an unexpected ac-

cident. If the slip indicator light

blinks and an alarm sounds, special

care should be taken while driving.

Only use tires of specified size. The

size, manufacturer, brand and tread

pattern for all 4 tires should be the

same. If you use the tires other

than specified, or different type or

size, the vehicle stability control

system may not function correctly.

When replacing the tires or wheels,

contact your Toyota dealer. (See

“Checking and replacing tires” on

page 333 in Section 7–2.)

Vehicle stability control

system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

151

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-

ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an

alarm sounds intermittently. Special care

should be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

Four–wheel drive models only—

Pushing the center differential lock

switch automatically turns the vehicle

stability control system off. At this

time, the “VSC OFF” indicator comes

on with the center differential lock indi-

cator light.

“VSC OFF” indicator light comes on for a

few seconds when the ignition key is

turned to “ON”. It will come on again

when you push the center differential lock

switch to turn off the system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The indicator light does not come on

when the ignition key is turned to

“ON”.

The indicator light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The indicator light comes on when the

system is on while driving.

NOTICE

Make sure that the center differential

lock indicator light goes off before

normal driving.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

152

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that when there is a

problem somewhere in the following.

Vehicle stability control system

Traction control system

(two–wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Hill–start assist control system

The light will come on when the ignition

key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after

about a few seconds.

The light may come on for 60 seconds

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It

is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if they

go out after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the

vehicle stability control system does not

work. However, as normal braking oper-

ates when being applied, there is no prob-

lem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

Two–wheel drive models only—The “TRAC

OFF” indicator light will come on when the

“VSC TRAC” warning light comes on even

if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

The downhill assist control system is a

system that assists the deceleration of

the engine brake when you drive down

a steep hill. When you are driving down

a hill with the four–wheel drive control

switch knob (full–time four–wheel drive

models) or multi–mode control switch

knob (multi–mode four–wheel drive

models) in the “L4” position, push the

“DAC” switch to limit the vehicle’s ac-

celeration. If the vehicle is traveling at

a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less,

you can descend at a constant speed.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the down-

hill assist control system. It may not

be able to maintain a low speed over

road surfaces or off–road surfaces on

which sliding can easily occur, such

as extremely steep slopes or icy or

muddy roads.

Downhill assist control system

(four–wheel drive models)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

153

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSIST

CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Full–time four–wheel drive models—

Turn the four–wheel drive control

switch knob to the “L4” position.

The system will not operate if the four–

wheel drive control switch knob is in the

“H4” position.

Multi–mode four–wheel drive mod-

els—Turn the multi–mode control

switch knob to the “L4” position.

The system will not operate if the multi–

mode control switch knob is in the “H4”

position.

2. In order to make full use of the en-

gine brake, putting the transmission

in “L” or “2” is recommended.

5–speed automatic transmission—The sys-

tem will operate even if the transmission

selector lever is in “D”, “4”, “3” or “N”.

However, when it is in “L” or “2” the en-

gine brake can also be utilized enabling

the system to operate more effectively.

4–speed automatic transmission—The sys-

tem will operate even if the transmission

selector lever is in “D”, “3” or “N”. Howev-

er, when it is in “L” or “2” the engine

brake can also be utilized enabling the

system to operate more effectively.

3. Push the “DAC” switch to turn the

system on. The downhill assist con-

trol system indicator light on the in-

strument panel will come on.

Full–time four–wheel drive models—If the

downhill assist control system indicator

light flashes, the selector lever may be in

“N” or the four–wheel drive control switch

knob may be in the “H4” position.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the switch is pushed, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Multi–mode four–wheel drive models—If

the downhill assist control system indica-

tor light flashes, the selector lever may be

in “N” or the multi–mode control switch

knob may be in the “H2” or “H4” position.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the switch is pushed, contact your

Toyota dealer.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

154

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

With the vehicle traveling at a speed of

25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release your

foot from the accelerator or brake pedal

to activate the system. The vehicle will

descend the hill at a low speed. While the

system is operating, the slip indicator light

on the instrument panel will flash and the

stop lights and high mounted stoplight will

be lit.

If you push the “DAC” switch to turn the

system off while it is in operation, the

system will stop operating gradually. The

downhill assist control system indicator

light will flash to alert the driver. To con-

tinue driving at a low speed, push the

“DAC” switch to turn the system on.

The slip indicator light and downhill assist

control system indicator light come on for

a few seconds when the ignition key is

turned to “ON”. If any of the indicator

lights does not come on when the ignition

is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the system is used frequently, the

brake actuator temperature may become

too high and a buzzer will sound inter-

mittently.

If this happens, the downhill assist control

system indicator light will flash and a

buzzer will sound intermittently. When the

temperature of the brake actuator goes

down, the system will begin to operate

again. Until it restarts, the active traction

control system and hill–start assist control

system will not operate; however, the con-

ventional brake can be operated.

If there is any abnormality in the sys-

tem, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will

come on. When the “DAC” switch is

pushed, the downhill assist control sys-

tem indicator light also flash.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes

on, there may be an abnormality in any

of the following systems in addition to the

downhill assist control system.

Hill–start assist control system

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

155

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“VSC TRAC” warning light

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning

light will come on and will go off after a

few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the above

mentioned system on such as slippery

roads. If the brake actuator temperature

becomes too high while any of the sys-

tems is operating, a buzzer will start to

sound intermittently to indicate that the

downhill assist control system can no lon-

ger operate. In this case, stop your ve-

hicle immediately at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the “VSC TRAC” warning

light will come on and the downhill assist

control system stops operating temporarily

in order to protect the brake actuator. (Al-

though the downhill assist control system

does not operate, it is no problem to con-

tinue your driving.) The system will be

automatically restored after a short time

and the “VSC TRAC” warning light goes

out.

If the warning light comes on while driv-

ing, the system does not work. However,

as normal braking operates when being

applied, it is no problem to continue your

driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The hill–start assist control system as-

sists you in starting to move up a

steep or slippery hill. When you start

to move up the hill slope, the system

helps to prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing backward in the interval while you

move your foot from the brake pedal to

the accelerator pedal.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the hill–

start assist control system. The ve-

hicle may not be able to start

smoothly on road surfaces or off–

road surfaces such as extremely

steep slopes or icy roads, on which

sliding can occur very easily.

Do not use the hill–start assist con-

trol system to stop the vehicle. This

system is not designed as a func-

tion for stopping the vehicle on a

uphill slope.

Hill–start assist control

system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

156

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The hill–start assist control system will

operate for 5 seconds maximally when

all of the following conditions apply.

5–speed automatic transmission—

When the transmission is in any of

positions “D”, “4”, “3”, “2” or “L”

4–speed automatic transmission—

When the transmission is in any of

positions “D”, “3”, “2” or “L”

When the brake pedal is not de-

pressed

The system is designed to operate when

the vehicle is starting on an uphill slope;

therefore, if the transmission is in “P” or

“N” it will not operate. It will not operate

either if the vehicle starts to move in

reverse on a slope with the transmission

in the “R”.

When the hill–start assist control system

is operating, the slip indicator light flashes

and an alarm sounds intermittently. At the

same time, the stop lamps and high

mounted stoplight are lit.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

Keep in mind the following when driv-

ing.

The hill–start assist control system op-

erates for 5 seconds maximally. If both

the brake and accelerator pedals re-

main undepressed for longer than 5

seconds, the buzzer will sound at more

frequent intervals and the system will

gradually stop operating.

The hill–start assist control system is

not designed as a function for stopping

the vehicle on a uphill slope. When

stopping the vehicle, be sure to de-

press the brake pedal.

If the system is used frequently, the

brake actuator temperature may become

too high and a buzzer will sound inter-

mittently.

In this case, a buzzer will sound intermit-

tently. When the temperature of the brake

actuator goes down, the system will begin

to operate again. Until it restarts, the trac-

tion control system (two–wheel drive mod-

els), active traction control system (four–

wheel drive models) and downhill assist

control system will not operate; however,

the conventional brake can be operated.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

157

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If there is any abnormality in the sys-

tem, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will

come on.

If the system malfunctions, the “VSC

TRAC” warning light will come on.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes

on, there may be an abnormality in any

of the following systems in addition to the

hill–start assist control system.

Downhill assist control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Traction control system

(two–wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

“VSC TRAC” warning light

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning

light will come on and will go off after a

few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the above

mentioned system on such as slippery

roads. If the brake actuator temperature

becomes too high while any of the sys-

tems is operating, a buzzer will start to

sound intermittently to indicate that the

hill–start assist control system can no lon-

ger operate. In this case, stop your ve-

hicle immediately at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the “VSC TRAC” warning

light will come on and the hill–start assist

control system stops operating temporarily

in order to protect the brake actuator. (Al-

though the hill–start assist control system

does not operate, it is no problem to con-

tinue your driving.) The system will be

automatically restored after a short time

and the “VSC TRAC” warning light goes

out.

If the warning light comes on while driv-

ing, the system does not work. However,

as normal braking operates when being

applied, it is no problem to continue your

driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

158

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This rear height control air suspension

controls the vehicle height depending

on the vehicle driving conditions. Select

your desired height among the “HI”

(high), “N” (normal) and “LO” (low)

modes with the height select switch.

(a) Vehicle height modes

“N” (normal) mode—

The vehicle height in this mode is standard.

Regardless of the number of occupants or the

luggage loading condition, the vehicle height

is always automatically adjusted to a fixed

height in this mode while the engine is

running.

This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

“HI” (high) mode—

The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6 in.)

higher at rear than the “N” mode height.

This mode is suitable when driving on the

bumpy roads and through water.

However, when the vehicle speed exceeds

about 30 km/h (19 mph) or over in the

“HI” mode, the “N” mode is automatically

selected.

CAUTION

The “HI” mode should be used for

severe off–road driving condition

only. Because the vehicle’s center of

gravity is higher in this setting, the

vehicle may become unstable when

turning abruptly, resulting in accident.

“LO” (low) mode—

The vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8 in.)

lower at rear than the “N” mode height.

This mode allows you easy access to the

vehicle (getting in and out) and easy load-

ing and unloading operation.

This mode is available when the vehicle

speed is under about 12 km/h (7 mph).

NOTICE

Use the “LO” mode when the vehicle

is stopped. Otherwise, when the ve-

hicle speed exceeds about 12 km/h (7

mph), “N” mode is selected automati-

cally. So be careful when you drive in

any place where the overhead height

is limited.

(b) Vehicle height mode changing con-

dition

To change the vehicle height, it is necessary

to meet the following conditions.

The engine should be running.

The height control “OFF” indicator light

should go off.

Rear height control air

suspension

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

159

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When selecting a mode, there is a ve-

hicle speed limit. Refer to the following

table.

Yes = The mode can be selected.

No = The mode cannot be selected.

“LO”

mode

“N”

mode

“HI”

mode

Under about

12 km/h

(7 mph) Yes Yes Yes

Under about

30 km/h

(19 mph) No Yes Yes

About

30 km/h

(19 mph) or

over

No Yes No

In the following cases, the rear height

control suspension will not operate.

The underbody of the vehicle has

touched the surface on bumpy roads.

The area around the rear suspension

is coated with ice.

If the vehicle is moved to its usual loca-

tion or the ice is removed and the height

select switch is pressed, the vehicle

height control cannot be operated. In this

case, turn off and restart the engine, then

push the control switches.

To change the mode, push the height

select switch on either side of “”

(higher) or “” (lower).

The height control indicator light indicates

which mode is selected. (See “(e) Height

control indicator light” described below.)

Selecting the “HI” mode—

Push the height select switch on the “”

side when the vehicle speed is under

about 30 km/h (19 mph).

To change the “N” mode to “HI”, push

the switch once.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

160

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To change the “LO” mode to “HI”, push

the switch twice. It takes about 30 sec-

onds until the “LO” mode changes to the

“HI” mode.

Selecting the “N” mode—

To change the “HI” mode to “N”, push

the height select switch on the “” side

once.

To change the “LO” mode to “N”, push

the height select switch on the “” side

once.

Selecting the “LO” mode—

Push the height select switch on the “”

side while the vehicle is stopped.

To change the “N” mode to “LO”, push

the switch once.

To change the “HI” mode to “LO”, push

the switch twice.

Even if the engine is stopped while the ve-

hicle height is being lowered, the operation

continues for up to 25 seconds. If, within

this 25 seconds, any of the side doors or the

back door is opened, operation will continue

for a further 15 seconds.

NOTICE



If the vehicle height is changed fre-

quently when the vehicle is heavily

loaded, the compressor may over-

heat, causing the vehicle height ad-

justment operation to stop.



Before you lower the vehicle height

with the height select switch, check

under the vehicle to make sure

nothing to damage the vehicle or

no one to be injured is there and

that the underbody of the vehicle

does not touch the ground.



After unloading, the height of a ve-

hicle equipped with the rear height

control air suspension becomes

slightly higher than the normal ve-

hicle height. Take sufficient care

where the overhead height is re-

stricted.



Do not select the “LO” mode in the

bumpy roads. If the underbody of

the vehicle touches the rugged road

surface, the vehicle may be dam-

aged.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

161

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(d) Turning off the rear height control

air suspension

To turn off the rear height control air

suspension with the vehicle stopped,

push the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF”

switch. The height control “OFF” indi-

cator light comes on and the vehicle

height is fixed in the same mode as the

height control switch is pushed.

This status is memorized in the system

even after the engine is stopped.

If you push the switch again, the height

control “OFF” indicator light goes out and

the rear height control air suspension is

turned on.

Even after the rear height control air suspen-

sion is turned off with the “HEIGHT CON-

TROL OFF” switch, if the vehicle speed ex-

ceeds 30 km/h (19 mph), the rear height

control air suspension automatically selects

the “N” mode.

CAUTION

If you drive through deep water over

about 700 mm (28 in.) in depth, put

the vehicle height in the “HI” mode

with the height select switch and then

turn off the rear height control air

suspension by pushing the “HEIGHT

CONTROL OFF” switch.

NOTICE



When jacking up or installing tire

chains, be sure to turn off the rear

height control air suspension by

pushing the “HEIGHT CONTROL

OFF” switch and stop the engine.

Otherwise, the vehicle height may

change because of the automatic

leveling function, resulting in an un-

expected accident.



If your vehicle must be towed, put

the vehicle height in the “N” mode

and turn off the rear height control

air suspension. Otherwise, the ve-

hicle height may change because of

the automatic leveling function, re-

sulting in an unexpected accident.



If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off

the rear height control air suspen-

sion with the “HEIGHT CONTROL

OFF” switch. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may change because of the

automatic leveling function resulting

in an unexpected accident.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

162

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(e) Height control indicator lights

1. Height control indicator lights

2. Height control “OFF” indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned on, all the

indicator lights come on. The indicator light

showing the present mode only remains on

and all other lights go off after a few sec-

onds. This means the system operates correct-

ly.

If you change the vehicle height mode,

the indicator lights change as follows:

When changing the vehicle height from

the “N” mode to “HI”:

1. The “N” mode indicator light goes off

and the “HI” mode indicator light blinks.

2. After the vehicle height control reaches

the “HI” mode, the “HI” mode indicator

light remains on.

If the underbody of the vehicle has

touched the surface on bumpy roads or

the area around the rear suspension is

coated with ice, the vehicle height cannot

be lowered with the height select switch.

The height control indicator lights change

as follows:

1. The present mode indicator light goes

off and the selected mode indicator

light blinks.

2. The selected mode indicator light goes

off. (The vehicle height does not

change.) The present mode indicator

light comes on again.

In this case, even if the vehicle is moved

to its usual location or the ice is removed

and the height select switch is pressed,

vehicle height control cannot be operated.

Turn off the engine once and then restart

it.

Height control “OFF” indicator light:

When the ignition switch is turned on, this

light comes on. If it goes out after a few

seconds, the rear height control air sus-

pension operates correctly. If you push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch, the rear

height control air suspension is turned off.

The height control “OFF” indicator light

comes on.

In the following cases, there is a problem

somewhere in the rear height control air

suspension. Although there is no problem

to continue normal driving, have the rear

height control air suspension checked by

your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

163

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The height control “OFF” indicator light

does not come on when the ignition

switch is turned on.

The height control “OFF” indicator light

blinks.

(f) Parking and stopping tips

If you immediately stop the engine to park

the vehicle after off–road driving, the ve-

hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve-

hicle becomes cool. When parking, make

sure there is nothing that will be in con-

tact with the underbody of the vehicle.

When you start the engine, the vehicle

returns to the previous height.

If you park the vehicle for a long time,

the vehicle height may be gradually low-

ered. When parking for a long time, make

sure there is nothing that will be in con-

tact with the underbody of the vehicle.

When you start the engine, the vehicle

returns to the previous height.

If you stop the engine, the vehicle height

may change in accordance with the

change in the temperature. When you

start the engine, the vehicle returns to the

previous height.

(g) Rear height control failure warning

If there is a problem somewhere in the

rear height control air suspension, the “N”

mode is automatically selected. If this oc-

curs, the height control “OFF” indicator

light blinks and the vehicle height control

cannot be activated until the malfunction

is corrected. If this is the case, bring your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible and have it checked.

When parking, firmly apply the parking

brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal. For better holding power, first de-

press the brake pedal and hold it while

setting the parking brake.

To release: Depress the parking brake

pedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake is

set, the parking brake reminder light in

the instrument panel remains on until you

release the parking brake.

Parking brake

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

164

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is fully released and the park-

ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruise

the vehicle at a desired speed over 40

km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained up

or down grades within the limits of engine

performance, although a slight speed

change may occur when driving up or

down the grades. On steeper hills, a

greater speed change will occur so it is

better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

To help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the

cruise control when driving in

heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-

pery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) or

winding roads.

Avoid vehicle speed increases when

driving downhill. If the vehicle

speed is too fast in relation to the

cruise control set speed, cancel the

cruise control then downshift the

transmission to use engine braking

to slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, press the

“ON–OFF” button. This turns the system

on. The indicator light in the instrument

panel shows that you can now set the

vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-

er press will turn the system completely

off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-

gagement, keep the “ON–OFF” button

off when not using the cruise control.

Cruise control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

165

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” before

you set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,

push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-

tion and release it. This sets the vehicle

at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-

tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,

or tap it down for a slower speed. Each

tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h

(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,

when passing—depress the accelerator

pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed

the set speed. When you release it, the

vehicle will return to the speed set prior

to the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-

rection and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40

km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-

matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10

mph) below the preset speed, the preset

speed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancels

out other than for the above cases, have

your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-

er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction

and hold it. Release the lever when the

desired speed is attained. While the lever

is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain

speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-

celerate the vehicle and then push the

lever down in the “– SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-

tion and hold it. Release the lever when

the desired speed is attained. While the

lever is held down, the vehicle speed will

gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-

press the brake pedal and then push the

lever down in the “– SET” direction.

Even if you downshift from “D” to “4”

(5–speed automatic transmission) or “3”

(4–speed automatic transmission), with the

cruise control on, engine braking will not

be enabled because the cruise control is

not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle

speed, reset to a slower speed with the

cruise control lever or depress the brake

pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise

control is cancelled.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

166

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling

the control lever or by depressing the

brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the

“+ RES” direction will restore the speed

set prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be-

low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset

speed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the

instrument cluster flashes when using the

cruise control, press the “ON–OFF” button

to turn the system off and then press it

again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-

curs, there is some trouble in the cruise

control system.

The indicator light does not come on.

The indicator light flashes again.

The indicator light goes out after it

comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota

dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

167

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Car audio system

Reference 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using your audio system 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio remote controls 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat audio system 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Car audio system operating hints 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

168

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Type 1: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-

pact disc player (with compact disc

changer controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-

pact disc player with changer

This section describes some of the basic

features on Toyota audio systems. Some

information may not pertain to your sys-

tem.

Your audio system works when the ignition

key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off.

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or

“LOAD” to turn on that function without

pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the cas-

sette or compact disc player, a cassette

or compact disc must be loaded in the

player.

You can turn on each player by inserting

a cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejecting

the cassette tape or compact disc. If the

audio system was previously off, then the

entire audio system will be turned off

when you eject the cassette tape or com-

pact disc. If the another function was pre-

viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or

“LOAD” if the system is already on but

you want to switch from one function to

another.

Reference Using your audio system—

—Some basics

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

169

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone and

balance controls, see the description of

your own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds to

you is largely determined by the mix of

the treble, midrange and bass levels. In

fact, different kinds of music and vocal

programs usually sound better with differ-

ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to

a stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increase the vol-

ume of one group of sounds while de-

creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed on

the inside of the rear quarter window.

NOTICE

Attaching the film (especially conduc-

tive or metallic type) on the rear

quarter glass will noticeably reduce

the sensitivity of the radio.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposed

tape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player and

do not insert anything other than cas-

sette tapes into the slot, or the tape

player may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it in

with the label side up. (The player will

automatically eject a disc if the label side

is down.) The player will play from track

1 through the end of the disc. Then it will

play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything other than com-

pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

170

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH

CHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”

button and gently push the disc in with

the label side up. (The player will auto-

matically eject a disc if the label side is

down.) This compact disc player can store

up to six discs. The player will play from

track 1 through the end of the disc. Then

it will play from track 1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE



Do not stack up two discs for in-

sertion, or it will cause damage to

the compact disc player. Insert only

one compact disc into slot at a

time.



Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything except a com-

pact disc into the slot.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

171

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

—Controls and features

Type 1

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

172

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE” or

“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the button

until you hear a beep—this will set the

station to the button. The button number

will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The button num-

ber and station frequency will appear on

the display.

These systems can store one AM and two

FM stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button to

eject a cassette. Push the compact disc

eject button to eject a compact disc.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to select

the other side of a cassette tape. The

display indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”

indicates the bottom side).

Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette

player reaches the end of a tape side, it

automatically reverses and begins to play

the other side. This is true whether the

cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast for-

ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)

to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on

the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”

or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play that same

side. If a tape fast forwards completely,

the cassette will play the other side of the

tape using the auto–reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio

and select the AM band. “AM” will appear

on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

By using the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob,

you can adjust the tone and sound bal-

ance. On some models, you can also turn

on or off the surround function.

Each time you push this knob, the mode

changes. To adjust the tone and balance

and turn on or off the surround function,

turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from –5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from –5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from –5 to 5.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

173

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround

function. “SURROUND ON” or

“SURROUND OFF” will appear on the

display.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compact

disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display one of the six following

error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up–side

down). Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over–current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

 DISC 

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc you

want to listen to.

Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

DolbyB NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was

recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,

push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” will

appear on the display. Push the button

again to turn off Dolby B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise

by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-

tion, play your tapes with this button on

or off according to the mode used to re-

cord the tape.

∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the

double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio

and select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”

will appear on the display. This system

allows you to set twelve FM stations, two

for each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

174

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the

track is playing. “ ” will appear on

the display. When the track ends, it will

automatically rewind and replay. To turn

off the repeat feature, push this button

again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank

space between tracks in order for the re-

peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—You can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

With compact disc changer only—

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the top track of

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

175

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a

beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-

play and the player will scan the first

track of the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the player has

scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-

ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button. Do this again to find the

station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down to

locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-

cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is

considered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,

the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the

player automatically reverses sides and

resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well

with some spoken word, live, or classical

recordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette

tape.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

176

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TEXT

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step

up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-

clockwise to step down the frequency.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

177

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

Type 2

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

178

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE” or

“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the button

until you hear a beep—this will set the

station to the button. The preset button

number will appear on the display.

RDS stations will be preset to the buttons

when you turn on the RDS. (See “RDS”

button.)

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM, two FM and

RDS stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM

TYPE” when you push “AM” or “FM” but-

ton.)

(Eject button)

Cassette player

This button is used to eject a cassette.

Compact disc player

This button is used to eject one or all

compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push

and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “” (preset

button 3) or “” (preset button 4) until the

number of the disc you want to eject is

displayed. Push and release the eject but-

ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and

hold the eject button until you hear a

beep. The last compact disc played before

pushing the button will be ejected first. If

the ejected disc is not removed for a long

time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to select

the other side of a cassette tape. The

display indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”

indicates the bottom side).

Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette

player reaches the end of a tape side, it

automatically reverses and begins to play

the other side. This is true whether the

cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast for-

ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)

to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on

the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”

or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play that same

side. If a tape fast forwards completely,

the cassette will play the other side of the

tape using the auto–reverse feature.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

179

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio

and select the AM band. “AM” will appear

on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

By using the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob,

you can adjust the tone and sound bal-

ance, and turn on or off the surround

function.

Each time you push this knob, the mode

changes. To adjust the tone and balance

and turn on or off the surround function,

turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from –5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from –5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from –5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround

function. “SURROUND ON” or “SUR-

ROUND OFF” will appear on the display.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compact

disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display one of the six following

error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up–side

down). Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over–current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

 DISC 

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

DolbyB NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was

recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,

push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” will

appear on the display. Push the button

again to turn off Dolby B NR.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

180

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise

by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-

tion, play your tapes with this button on

or off according to the mode used to re-

cord the tape.

∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the

double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio

and select the FM band. “FM1”, “FM2” or

“FM TYPE” will appear on the display.

This system allows you to set twelve FM

and six RDS stations, three for each of

the preset button. If the RDS is off or

RDS stations are not preset to the preset

buttons, “FM TYPE” will not appear on the

display.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact

discs in the compact disc player. This

player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly

push and release the button, then insert

a compact disc. After the disc is loaded,

the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and

hold the button (until you hear a beep

when the audio system is on), then insert

the first compact disc. After the disc is

loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.

After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-

matically open again so the next disc can

be inserted. The same process can be

applied for loading the rest of the discs.

If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”

will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RDS (Radio Data System)

Your audio system is equipped with Radio

Data System (RDS). RDS station providing

good reception is automatically selected if

current reception worsens.

The “RDS” button turns the RDS on and

off. This button is operational except in

AM mode.

To turn on the RDS, push and hold this

button until you hear a beep and “RDS”

will appear on the display. At this time,

the radio starts to search the RDS sta-

tions and “RDS SEARCH” will flash on the

display.

Quickly push and release this button when

the RDS turns on, the radio starts to

search the RDS stations and “RDS

SEARCH” will flash on the display.

When the RDS stations are found,

“FOUND” and the number of the RDS sta-

tions will appear on the display, and you

will hear two beeps. The stations will be

preset to the preset buttons.

If the RDS stations can not be found, “NO

RDS ST” will appear on the display and

you will hear a beep, and the display

returns to the previous mode.

To turn the RDS off, push the button until

you hear a beep again.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

181

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the

track is playing. “ ” will appear on

the display. When the track ends, it will

automatically rewind and replay. To turn

off the repeat feature, push this button

again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank

space between tracks in order for the re-

peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—You can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the top track of

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold “” or “” side of the

“SCAN” button until you hear a beep. The

radio will tune in the next preset station

up or down the band, stay there for 5

seconds, and then move to the next pre-

set station. To stop scanning, push this

button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release “” or “” side

of the “SCAN” button. The radio will find

the next station up or down the station

band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then

scan again to the next station. To stop

scanning, push this button again.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

182

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release “” or “” side

of the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear

on the display and the player will scan up

or down all the tracks on the disc you are

listening to. To stop scanning, push this

button again. If the player scanned all the

tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push “” or “” side of the “SCAN” but-

ton until you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will

appear on the display and the player will

scan up or down the first track of the

next disc. To stop scanning, push this

button again. If the auto changer has

scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-

ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button. Do this again to find the

station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down to

locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-

cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is

considered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,

the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the

player automatically reverses sides and

resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well

with some spoken word, live, or classical

recordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette

tape.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

183

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDS

mode.

When an RDS radio station transmits a

text message, “TEXT” will be displayed. At

this time, push the “TEXT” button to view

the text message. The message display

will be canceled if any button that affects

the display is pushed. To view the mes-

sage again, push this button again. After

the entire message has been displayed,

the message will disappear.

The RDS audio system has memory to

store three 64–character messages. To

store a message in memory, push and

hold the “TEXT” button until you hear a

beep.

If three messages are already stored in

memory, the oldest message will be over-

written by the new message.

To recall a radio text message, push the

“TEXT” button momentarily. This will dis-

play the most recent message. Each push

of the button will display messages in the

order of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or if

there are no more messages to be re-

called, “NO MESSAGE” will appear on the

display, and the message display will be

canceled.

The message display will be canceled if

you activate any function that affects the

display.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement

(TA) feature on and off. This button is

operational only in FM mode.

By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAF

SEEK” will flash on the display and the

radio will start seeking any traffic program

station.

When a traffic program station is found,

“TRAF” will be displayed and you will hear

a beep.

After the traffic announcement program is

over, the display returns to the previous

mode.

If no traffic program station is found, “NO

TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a

few seconds and the display returns to

the previous mode.

To cancel the traffic announcement, push

this button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step

up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-

clockwise to step down the frequency.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

184

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TYPE (Program Types)

When you push the “TYPE” button while

receiving an RDS station, the current pro-

gram type appears on the display.

Each time you push this button, the pro-

gram type changes as in the following:

ROCK

EASY LIS (Easy listening)

CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

INFORM (Information)

RELIGION

MISC (Miscellaneous)

ALERT (Emergency message)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

185

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Some parts of the audio system can be

adjusted using the switches on the steer-

ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,

and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “” switch

3. “MODE” switch

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

186

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Volume control switch

Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol-

ume continues to increase while the

switch is being pushed.

Push “–” to decrease the volume. The

volume continues to decrease while the

switch is being pushed.

2. “” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:

Quickly push and release the “” or “”

side of the switch. Do this again to select

the next preset station.

To seek a station:

Push and hold the “” or “” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Do this

again to find the next station. If you push

the switch on either side during the seek

mode, seeking will be cancelled.

Cassette player

This switch has the following features—

To skip to a different track in either direc-

tion:

Quickly push and release the “” or “”

side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will

appear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switch

until the track you want to listen to is set.

If you push the switch ten times, the skip

function will turn off. (You can skip up to

nine tracks at a time.)

When counting the number of the tracks

you want to rewind, remember to count

the current track as well. For example, if

you want to rewind to a song that is two

tracks before the song you are listening

to, push the “” side of the switch three

times.

If you push the track switch further than

you wanted to, push the other side of the

switch. The track number will be in-

creased or reduced.

The track number you select is not valid

if it is higher than the number of the

tracks remaining on the current side of

the cassette.

When the tape reaches to the begin-

ning, the player will automatically start

playing that side.

After the tape reaches to the end, the

player will automatically reverse and

start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank

space between tracks for the track switch

to work correctly. In addition, the feature

may not work well with some spoken, live,

or classical recordings.

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “” side of the switch

to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” will

appear on the display. Push and hold the

“” side of the switch to rewind a tape.

“REW” will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push the “” side of the switch. To

stop the tape while it is rewinding, push

the “” side of the switch.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play that same

side. If a tape fast forwards completely,

the cassette will play the other side of the

tape using the auto–reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to a

different track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “” or “”

side of the switch until the track you want

to listen to is set. If you want to return

to the beginning of the current track, push

the “” side of the switch once, quickly.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

187

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

With compact disc changer only—

Push and hold the “” or “” side of the

switch until the disc you want to listen to

is set.

3. “MODE” switch

Push “MODE” switch to select an audio

mode. Each push changes the mode se-

quentially if the desired mode is ready to

use.

To turn the audio system on, push the

“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push and

hold the “MODE” switch until the system

turns off.

The rear seat audio system is designed

for the rear seat passengers to enjoy the

audio sound separately between the front

seats and rear seats.

The rear seat audio system can be turned

on with the rear audio system controller

even if the front audio system is off.

When the front audio is turned off, the

rear audio system will be turned off simul-

taneously.

The rear passengers can enjoy all the

modes (AM and FM radio, cassette tape

player, compact disc player, compact disc

player with changer and DVD player) with

the rear seat audio system when a cas-

sette tape and discs are loaded in the

front audio system.

When the same mode is selected on the

front and rear audio systems at the same

time, the system can be operated on the

front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the front

and rear audio systems at the same time,

AM and FM modes cannot be changed on

the rear seat audio system.

You can enjoy the rear seat audio system

with a special headphone. For details, re-

fer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

The wireless headphone can be used with-

in a radius of approximately 7 m (23 ft.)

from the rear seat audio system. If the

signal becomes weak, the headphone will

mute.

You can purchase a wireless headphone

at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not drive with using the head-

phone. Otherwise, you may be hard

to hear the sound from the outside

while using the headphone and may

cause an accident.

With DVD player:

Conversational speech on some

DVDs is recorded at a low volume

to emphasize the impact of sound

effects. If you adjust the volume

assuming that the conversations

represent the maximum volume lev-

el that the DVD will play, you may

be startled by louder sound effects

or when you change to a different

audio source. Be sure to adjust the

volume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-

creased, before you turn on the

headphone.

Rear seat audio system—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

188

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The rear seat audio system consists of

following components.

1. Front audio system

2. Rear seat audio system display

3. Rear seat audio system controller

4. Controller holder

The rear seat audio system can be oper-

ated with the rear seat audio system con-

troller.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the

controller. It may cause an accident,

fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct

sunlight, high heat and high humidity.

These conditions could cause the

case to deform or the battery to ex-

plode or leak.

—Rear seat audio system

controller

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

189

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER

(for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-

ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-

vents the battery from being dis-

charged. Before using the controller,

remove the insulating sheet.

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat audio system con-

troller, direct the signal output portion

of the controller to the signal reception

portion of the rear seat audio system

display.

The rear seat audio system controller can

be operated when the ignition switch is in

the “ACC” or “ON” position.

The controller does not operate properly

when the signal reception portion of the

display is exposed to direct sunlight.

Block the display from direct sunlight.

Details of specific buttons, controls, and

features of the controller, see

“CONTROLLER FEATURES” on page 191

in this Section.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the

controller may be damaged.



Do not drop or strongly knock the

controller against hard objects.



Do not sit on or place heavy ob-

jects on the controller.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

190

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in the

holder when it is not in use. The holder

can be hooked on the back of the driv-

er’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, stow the controller in

the holder when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposed

to high temperatures (such as on the

instrument panel) for a long time,

otherwise the controller may be dam-

aged.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

191

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CONTROLLER FEATURES

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

4. “OFF” button

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-

tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations for

the band of the front audio system. (For

instructions, see “—Controls and features”

on page 171 in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button. The radio will tune in the next

preset station up or down the band. The

station frequency will appear on the dis-

play.

Cassette tape player

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button to select the other side of a cas-

sette tape. The display indicates which

side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates

the top side, “ ” indicates the bottom

side.)

Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette

player reaches the end of a tape side, it

automatically reverses and begins to play

the other side. This is true whether the

cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

Compact disc player and DVD player

With disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc you

want to listen to.

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button until the number of the disc you

want to listen to appears on the display.

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

Use the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”

(TUNE/TRACK) button briefly. Each time

you push the button, the radio will step up

or down to another frequency. If you push

and hold the button and the radio will go

into the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/

TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or

down for a station of the nearest frequen-

cy and will stop on reception. Each time

you push the button, the stations will be

searched automatically one after another.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

192

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Cassette tape player

To fast forward a cassette tape, push and

hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until

“FF” will appears on the display. Push and

hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until

“REW” appears on the display to rewind

a tape.

Use this button to skip up or down to

locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-

cluding current one).

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the

display.

Next, push either side of the track button

until the number on the display reaches

the number of tracks you want to skip. If

you push the button 10 times, the skip

feature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly a

blank space of at least 3 seconds is con-

sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,

the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the

player automatically reverses sides and

resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well

with some spoken, live, or classical re-

cordings.

Compact disc player and DVD player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton until the number of the track or chap-

ter you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track or chapter, quick-

ly push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button

one time.

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/

TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse

within a disc. When you release the but-

ton, the disc player will resume playing.

With disc changer only—

You can either scan the tracks or chap-

ters on a specific disc or scan the first

tracks or chapters of all the discs in the

changer.

Scanning the tracks or chapters on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”

(TUNE/TRACK) button. “LOAD” will appear

on the display and the player will scan all

the tracks or chapters on the disc you are

listening to. To stop scanning, push this

button again. If the player scanned all the

tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks or chapters of all

the discs in the changer:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/

TRACK) button. The player will scan the

first track or chapter of the next disc. To

stop scanning, release the button. If the

player has scanned all the discs, it will

stop scanning.

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

Push the “ON/SOURCE” button to turn on

the rear seat audio system.

Use the “ON/SOURCE” button to select an

audio mode when the rear seat audio sys-

tem is on. Each time you push this but-

ton, the system changes between the ra-

dio, cassette player, compact disc player,

compact disc changer and DVD changer.

When you change the mode, the display

indicates which mode is selected.

When a cassette tape and discs are not

loaded in the front audio system, only a

radio mode can be selected in the rear

seat audio system.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

193

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If you push the “ON/SOURCE” button on

rear seat audio system controller to select

the casette tape player mode or disc play-

er mode in that case, a beep sounds from

front audio system and “INVALID” flashes

on the display for 6 seconds, and then the

rear audio system returns to the radio

mode.

If you push the “ON/SOURCE” button

while receiving an emergency broadcast,

a beep sounds and “INVALID” appears on

the display to indicate that no button can

be operated.

Radio

AM mode

When you select the AM mode, “AM” will

appear on the display.

FM mode

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or

“FM2” will appear on the display.

If the front audio system receives a traffic

announcement (TA) while the rear seat

audio system is in the radio mode,

“TRAF” will flash on the display and the

rear seat audio system will turn off. When

the front audio receives a traffic an-

nouncement (TA), the rear seat audio sys-

tem cannot select the AM/FM mode.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the display while this

mode is selected.

Disc players

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the display while this

mode is selected.

The display shows the track, or track and

disc number currently being played.

DVD video disc mode

“DVD” appears on the display while this

mode is selected.

The display shows the track or chapter, or

track or chapter and disc number currently

being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display one of the five following

error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged

or inserted incorrectly (up–side down).

Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“ERR 2”: The compact disc changer of

separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERR 3”: There is a problem inside the

system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set

the disc or magazine again.

“ERR 4”: Over–current. Ask your Toyota

dealer to inspect.

“OPEN”: The compact disc changer lid of

separate unit is open. Close the compact

disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

4. “OFF” button

Push “OFF” button to turn off the rear

seat audio system.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

194

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken that

small children do not swallow the re-

moved battery or components.

NOTICE



When replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.



Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by a Toyota dealer.



Dispose of used batteries according

to the local regulations.

Replace the battery by using the following

procedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing the

lock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.

3. Put a new battery with the positive (+)

side up.

Put in the case securely.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

195

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE



Make sure that the positive side of

the controller battery is facing cor-

rectly.



Do not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause rust.



Do not touch or move any compo-

nents inside of the controller, or it

may interfere with proper operation.



Be careful not to bend the electrode

of the controller battery insertion

and that dust or oil does not ad-

here to the transmitter case.



Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

controller operates properly. If the control-

ler still does not operate properly, contact

your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-

erations:



Be careful not to spill beverages

over the audio system.



Do not put anything other than a

cassette tape or compact disc into

the slot.



The use of a cellular phone inside

or near the vehicle may cause a

noise from the speakers of the au-

dio system. This does not indicate

a malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with

your radio—it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or telephone wires can interfere with

AM signals. And of course, radio signals

have a limited range. The farther you are

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-

lems that probably do not indicate a prob-

lem with your radio:

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 40 km (25

miles). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by distor-

tion.

Multi–path—FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for two signals to reach

your antenna at the same time. If this

happens, the signals will cancel each oth-

er out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal you

are listening to is interrupted or weak-

ened, and there is another strong station

nearby on the FM band, your radio may

tune in the second station until the origi-

nal signal can be picked up again.

Car audio system operating

hints

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

196

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere—especially at night.

These reflected signals can interfere with

those received directly from the radio sta-

tion, causing the radio station to sound

alternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-

nal and a signal received directly from a

radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening, or electri-

cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

AND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-

sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-

larly.

A dirty tape head or tape path can

decrease sound quality and tangle your

cassette tapes. The easiest way to

clean them is by using a cleaning tape.

(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high–quality cassettes.

Low–quality cassette tapes can cause

many problems, including poor sound,

inconsistent playing speed, and

constant auto–reversing. They can also

get stuck or tangled in the cassette

player.

Do not use a cassette if it has been

damaged or tangled or if its label is

peeling off.

Do not leave a cassette in the player

if you are not listening to it, especially

if it is hot outside.

Store cassettes in their cases and out

of direct sunlight.

Avoid using cassettes with a total play-

ing time longer than 100 minutes (50

minutes per side). The tape used in

these cassettes is thin and could get

stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

PLAYER AND DISCS

Your compact disc player is intended

for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

Extremely high temperatures can keep

your compact disc player from working.

On hot days, use the air conditioning

to cool the vehicle interior before you

listen to a disc.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations may

cause your compact disc player to

skip.

If moisture gets into your compact disc

player, you may not hear any sound

even though your compact disc player

appears to be working. Remove the

disc from the player and wait until it

dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisible

laser beam which could cause hazard-

ous radiation exposure if directed

outside the unit. Be sure to operate

the player correctly.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

197

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Use only compact discs marked as

shown above. The following products

may not be playable on your compact

disc player.

Copy–protected CD

CD–R (CD–Recordable)

CD–RW (CD–Re–writable)

CD–ROM

Special shaped discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the player or

changer, do not use special shaped,

low quality or labeled discs such as

those shown in the illustrations.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

198

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Correct Wrong

Handle compact discs carefully, espe-

cially when you are inserting them.

Hold them on the edge and do not

bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints

on them, particularly on the shiny side.

Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the

player to skip or to repeat a section of

a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the

disc up to the light.)

Remove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not listening to

them. Store them in their plastic cases

away from moisture, heat, and direct

sunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a

soft, lint–free cloth that has been damp-

ened with water. Wipe in a straight line

from the center to the edge of the disc

(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,

lint–free cloth. Do not use a conventional

record cleaner or anti–static device.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

199

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Air conditioning system

Controls 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air flow selector settings 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating tips 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel and rear vents 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

200

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. “AUTO” button

3. Temperature selector

4. “A/C” button

5. Air flow selector

6. Air intake selector

7. “OFF” button

Controls (without “DUAL” button)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

201

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-

tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi-

cator light will illuminate to show that the

automatic operation mode has been se-

lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air

conditioning selects the most suitable fan

speed, air flow, air intake and on–off of

the air conditioning according to the tem-

perature.

When you push the “AUTO” button with

the air intake mode at FRESH, internal

circulation may be applied for maximum

cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want

to select your own settings.

To turn off the automatic operation, push

the “OFF” button.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad-

just the fan speed and push it. An indica-

tor light will illuminate to show which fan

speed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to adjust the fan speed unless you desire

another fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the

“UP” side, to decrease it, push the

“DOWN” side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-

mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you

adjust to maximum warming.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air

conditioning system.

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the

vents used for air flow. An indicator light

will illuminate to show which air flow

mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to select the air flow unless you desire

another air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrument

panel vents and rear vents.

2. Bi–level—Air flows from both the floor

vents, the instrument panel vents and

rear vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

202

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the

windshield vents.

When this button is pressed, air flows

mainly from the windshield vents and

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns

the air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to

select FRESH automatically. This is to

clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to

RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-

take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears

the front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “Air flow selector settings” described

below.

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source.

An indicator light will illuminate to show

which the air source is being selected.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside

the vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-

tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, push the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there

is a problem in the air conditioning system

and the air conditioning automatically

shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-

hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

203

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. Temperature selector

(at the independent mode: for driver)

(at the linked mode: for driver and

front passenger)

3. “AUTO” button

4. “DUAL” button

5. Temperature selector

(for front passenger)

6. Air flow selector

7. Air intake selector

8. “A/C” button

9. “OFF” button

Controls (with “DUAL” button)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

204

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-

tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi-

cator light will illuminate to show that the

automatic operation mode has been se-

lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air

conditioning selects the most suitable fan

speed, air flow, air intake and on–off of

the air conditioning according to the tem-

perature.

When you push the “AUTO” button with

the air intake mode at FRESH, internal

circulation may be applied for maximum

cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want

to select your own settings.

To turn off the automatic operation, push

the “OFF” button.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad-

just the fan speed and push it. An indica-

tor light will illuminate to show which fan

speed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to adjust the fan speed unless you desire

another fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the “”

side, to decrease it, push the “” side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-

mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you

adjust to maximum warming.

“DUAL” button

This button is used to set the tempera-

tures independently for the driver’s seat

and front passenger seat.

Pushing the button changes the mode

from independent and linked.

Independent mode: Temperatures can be

set independently for the driver’s seat and

front passenger’s seat. An indicator light

will illuminated to show that the indepen-

dent mode has been selected.

Linked mode: The same temperature is

set for the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger’s seat.

When the temperature for the front pas-

senger’s seat is changed in linked mode,

the mode is changed automatically to in-

dependent mode.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air

conditioning system.

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the

vents used for air flow. An indicator light

will illuminate to show which air flow

mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to select the air flow unless you desire

another air flow mode.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

205

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrument

panel vents and rear vents.

2. Bi–level—Air flows from both the floor

vents, the instrument panel vents and

rear vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the

windshield vents.

When this button is pressed, air flows

mainly from the windshield vents and

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns

the air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to

select FRESH automatically. This is to

clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to

RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-

take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears

the front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “Air flow selector settings” described

below.

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source.

An indicator light will illuminate to show

which the air source is being selected.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside

the vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-

tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

206

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, push the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there

is a problem in the air conditioning system

and the air conditioning automatically

shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-

hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

207

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes.

This vents the hot air, allowing the air

conditioning to cool the interior more

quickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in front

of the windshield are not blocked (by

leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield. The windshield could

fog up because of the difference in air

temperature on the inside and outside

of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate through-

out the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed to

high for a minute to help clear the

intake ducts of snow or moisture. This

can reduce the amount of fogging on

the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-

hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake selector be set to

FRESH and the fan speed selector to

any setting.

Air flow selector settings Operating tips

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

208

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty

conditions, it is recommended that the

air intake selector be temporarily set to

RECIRCULATE, which will close off the

outside passage and prevent outside

air and dust from entering the vehicle

interior.

Heating

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—To the desired

temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards WARM

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—FLOOR

Air conditioning—OFF

For quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the

windows from fogging, select fresh af-

ter the vehicle interior has been war-

med.

Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-

fied heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or

defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—To the desired

temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—ON

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards COLD

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—ON

For quick cooling, select recirculated

air for a few minutes.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

209

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Ventilation

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—Towards low temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards COLD

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

—The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

—For automatic operation

Temperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperature

to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperature

to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow button

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-

ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-

matically. This is to clean up the front

view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to RE-

CIRCULATE mode, press the air intake

selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference be-

tween the outside and inside tempera-

tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

—For automatic operation

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

210

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Pressing the windshield air flow button

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-

ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-

matically. This is to clean up the front

view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to RE-

CIRCULATE mode, press the air intake

selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

To heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choose

floor/windshield air flow.

Center vents

Side vents

Rear vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check

the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

The instrument panel vents and rear vents

may be opened or closed as shown.

Instrument panel and rear

vents

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

211

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Other equipment

Multi–information display 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compass 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power outlet 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glove box 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Garage door opener 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary boxes 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear console box 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tissue box holder 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coin holder 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trash holder 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front cup holders 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear cup holders and tray 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bottle holders 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tie–down hooks 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Grocery bag hooks 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo net hooks 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage cover 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Double deck 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roof luggage carrier 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Floor mat 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

212

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. “RESET” button

2. “MODE” button

3. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”

button—Cruise information display

Air conditioning system with “DUAL”

button—Outside temperature and cruise

information display

4. Clock

5. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”

button only—Outside temperature

display

6. “:00” button

7. “M” button

8. “H” button

Multi–information display—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

213

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Operate the multi–information display

with the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to

“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-

played just before the ignition switch is

turned off will appear.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the multi–information

display, the display will automatically be

set to the initial mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

The digital clock indicates the time.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.

To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

If quick adjustment to a full hour is de-

sired, push the “:00” button.

For example, if the “:00” button is de-

pressed when the time is between

1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.

If the time is between 1:30—1:59, the

time will change to 2:00.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the clock, the time dis-

play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one

o’clock).

The outside temperature display indi-

cates the outside air temperature. The

displayed value is updated.

The displayed temperature ranges from

–30C (–22F) up to 50C (122F).

If there is some abnormality in the con-

nection of the outside air temperature sen-

sor, “––C” (“––F”) will appear on the

display. If “––C” (“––F”) appears on the

display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “––C” (“––F”)

appears momentarily when the ignition is

quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it

goes out soon.

—Before using the

multi–information display —Clock

—Outside temperature display

(air conditioning system without

“DUAL” button)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

214

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Air conditioning system with

“DUAL” button only—

The outside temperature display (air

conditioning system with “DUAL” but-

ton) and cruise information display indi-

cates the following information.

Every time you push the “MODE” but-

ton, the display toggles through this

information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Driving range

3. Average fuel consumption

4. Average vehicle speed

5. Display off

The displayed values in the cruise infor-

mation display indicate general driving

conditions. Accuracy varies with driving

habits and road conditions.

1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE C”

or “OUTSIDE F”)

The outside temperature display indi-

cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed value is updated every 1

second.

The displayed temperature ranges from

–30C (–22F) up to 50C (122F).

If there is some abnormality in the con-

nection of the outside air temperature sen-

sor, “––C” (“––F”) will appear on the

display. If “––C” (“––F”) appears on the

display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “––C” (“––F”)

appears momentarily when the ignition is

quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it

goes out soon.

—Cruise information display

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

215

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Driving range

(“RANGE MI” or “RANGE km”)

The distance the vehicle can travel with

the remaining fuel is calculated and

displayed based on the quantity of re-

maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The driving range display indicates the

approximate distance that you can drive

until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is

different from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated about ev-

ery 10 seconds.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-

culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-

ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-

sumption is good, the driving range will be

longer. If fuel consumption is poor, the

driving range will be shorter.

If the low fuel level warning light comes

on, refuel even if the display indicates

that the vehicle can be driven further.

3. Average fuel consumption

(“AVG. MPG” or “AVG. L/100 km”)

Average fuel consumption is calculated

and displayed based on total driving

distance and total fuel consumption

with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev-

ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the

“RESET” button about 1 second.

4. Average vehicle speed

(“AVG. MPH” or “AVG. km/h”)

Average vehicle speed is calculated and

displayed based on total driving dis-

tance and total driving time with the

engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev-

ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the

“RESET” button about 1 second.

The direction is indicated on the inside

rear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off with

the system on, the system will automati-

cally turn back on when the ignition switch

is turned on.

Push the “COMP” switch to turn the com-

pass system on and off.

Compass

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

216

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The compass indicates the direction

that the vehicle is heading. In the

above case, it shows that the vehicle is

heading north.

Displays Directions

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

The compass may not show the correct

direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately af-

ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while the

vehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off imme-

diately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-

terference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel

tower, between buildings, roof parking,

near a crossing, near a large vehicle,

etc.).

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a

magnet or a metal object on or near

the inside rear view mirror.)

The battery has been disconnected.

Your vehicle is out of the set zone. Refer

to the “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” be-

low to set the zone number.

The compass works to calibrate the direc-

tion automatically while the vehicle is in

motion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for complete

calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE

COMPASS” below.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the wind-

shield.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal object

on or near the inside rear view mirror

of the vehicle. Doing this may cause

malfunction of the compass sensor.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

217

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation

calibration)

The direction display on the compass

deviates from the true direction deter-

mined by the earth’s magnetic field. The

angle of deviation varies according to the

geographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,

then push and hold the “COMP” switch

until the zone number appears on the dis-

play. Then push the “COMP” switch, refer-

ring to the following map to select the

number of the zone where the vehicle is.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

218

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system for

several seconds returns it to the compass

mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

Hawaii: 5

Samoa: 5

Guam: 8

Saipan: 8

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

219

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling

calibration)

Sometimes the direction display on the

compass may not change after a turn. To

rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and

hold the “COMP” switch until “C” appears

on the display.

If “C” appears on the display because of

a drastic change in the magnetic field,

perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5

mph) or less. If there is not enough space

to drive in a circle, drive around the

block.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above

method, calibration is completed when the

direction is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed because

of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your

vehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just after

you have purchased your Toyota. And

then always perform circling calibration

after the battery has been removed, re-

placed or disconnected.

Do not perform circling calibration of

the compass in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-

terference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel

tower, between buildings, roof parking,

near a crossing, near a large vehicle,

etc.).

During calibration, do not operate elec-

tric systems (moon roof, power win-

dows, etc.) as they may interfere with

the calibration.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

220

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration,

be sure to secure a wide space,

and watch out for people and ve-

hicles in the neighborhood. Do not

violate any local traffic rules while

performing circling calibration.

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

Rear console box

Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed for

power supply for car accessories.

In the rear console box—To use the

power outlet, push the lid of the auxil-

iary box to open.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”

position for the power outlet to be used.

Power outlet (12 VDC)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

221

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE



To prevent the fuse from being

blown, do not use the electricity

over the total vehicle capacity of 12

VDC/120W.



To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlets longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.



Close the power outlet lids when

the power outlets are not in use.

Inserting a foreign object other than

the appropriate plug that fits the

outlet, or allowing any liquid into

the outlet may cause electrical fail-

ure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for use

as a power supply for electric ap-

pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position for

the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

Power outlet (115 VAC)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

222

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE



To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.



Close the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

a foreign object other than the ap-

propriate plug that fits the outlet

may cause electrical failure or short

circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even

though their power consumption is un-

der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances

may not operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode–ray tube type televisions,

compressor–driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer–

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

To use the glove box, do this.

To open: Pull the lever.

With the instrument panel lights on, the

glove box light will come on.

To lock: Insert the master key and turn it

clockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the glove box door

closed while driving.

Glove box

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

223

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

On some models, an auxiliary box is

located inside the glove box.

To increase the capacity of the glove box,

raise the lower panel of the auxiliary box.

The garage door opener ( 

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured

under license from HomeLink and can

be programmed to operate garage

doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,

home lighting systems, and security

systems, etc.

Garage door opener

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

224

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(a) Programming the HomeLink

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3

buttons and you can store one program

for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the

HomeLink, install a new battery in the

hand–held transmitter prior to program-

ming.

The battery side of the hand–held trans-

mitter must be pointed away from the

HomeLink during the programming pro-

cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure

in “Programming an entrance gate/pro-

gramming all devices in the Canadian

market”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons

you want to program.

2. Place your hand–held garage transmit-

ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from

the surface of the HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the

hand–held garage transmitter button

along with the selected HomeLink but-

ton.

4. When the indicator light on the

HomeLink changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by

pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener,

check to see if the garage door opens

and closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-

tify if your garage transmitter is of the

“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button. The ga-

rage door has the rolling code feature if

the indicator light (on the HomeLink)

flashes rapidly and then remains lit after

2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is

the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the

heading “Programming a rolling code sys-

tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”

equipped, it is necessary to follow

steps 1 through 4 under the heading

“Programming the HomeLink” before

proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

The exact location and color of the

button may vary by brand of garage

door opener. Refer to the owner’s

guide supplied by the garage door

opener manufacturer for the location of

this “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds

in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-

grammed HomeLink button twice. The

garage door may open. If the door

does open, the programming process is

complete. If the door does not open,

press and release the button a third

time. This third press and release will

complete the programming process by

opening the garage door.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

225

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The ceiling mounted garage door opener

motor should now recognize the

HomeLink unit and be able activate the

garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program-

ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink but-

tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand–held gate/device

transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

away from the surface of the

HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selected

HomeLink button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)

the hand–held gate/device transmitter

button every two seconds until step 5

is complete.

5. When the indicator light on the

HomeLink changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by

pressing the newly programmed button.

Check to see if the gate/device oper-

ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home

security systems, home door locks or

lighting, contact your authorized Toyota

dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be

erased, however, to reprogram a single

button, follow the procedure “Programming

the HomeLink”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink

To operate the HomeLink, press the

appropriate HomeLink button to activate

the programmed device. The HomeLink

indicator light should come on. The

HomeLink continues to send the signal

for up to 20 seconds as long as the

button is pressed.

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes

at one time, press and hold down the 2

outside buttons for 20 seconds until the

indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase

the programs stored in the HomeLink

memory.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

226

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, you may be

operating a garage door or other

device. Make sure people and ob-

jects are out of the way of the ga-

rage door or other device to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Univer-

sal Transceiver with any garage

door opener that lacks the safety

stop and reverse feature as re-

quired by federal safety standards.

(This includes any garage door

opener model manufactured before

April 1, 1982.) A garage door open-

er which cannot detect an object

(signaling the door to stop and re-

verse), does not meet current feder-

al safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these features

increases risk of serious injury or

death.

FCC ID: CB2300NHL3

CANADA: 2791032088

This device complies with FCC Rules

Part 15. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence that may be received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been

tested and complies with FCC and

DOC/MPAC rules. Changes or modifi-

cations not expressly approved by the

partly responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the device.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the

lids as shown in the following illustra-

tions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the auxiliary box

closed while driving.

Type A—As this holder is designed

for holding a light object such as

eyeglasses, do not place any heavy

objects in them. Heavy objects may

cause the holder to open and the

contents to fly out resulting in inju-

ries.

NOTICE

Type A—During hot weather, the inte-

rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.

Do not leave anything flammable or

deformable such as a lighter, glasses,

etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxes—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

227

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Type A (over head console)

Type B (instrument panel)

Type C (rear console box)

Type D (rear tire house)

Type E (right side of luggage compart-

ment)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

228

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The right side of luggage compartment

auxiliary box is equipped with a belt to

hold the objects.

To use the belt, do the following.

1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.

2. To tighten: Pull on the belt.

Make sure the objects are securely held.

CONSOLE BOX TABLE

To use the console box table, open it.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the table closed while

driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the table, do

not place any object heavier than 1

kg (2.20 lb.) on it, and do not leave

any object on the table for a long

time.

—Using the holding belts Rear console box

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

229

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull up

the console box lid while pushing the

lock release button.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the console box closed

while driving.

The rear console box is equipped with

a tissue box holder on the inside of the

rear console box lid.

To use the tissue box holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push-

ing the lock release button.

2. Place a tissue box in the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, keep the console box

lid closed when it is not in use.

Tissue box holder

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

230

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The rear console box is equipped with

a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push-

ing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Coin holder Trash holder

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

231

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The trash holder is designed to use the

grocery bag as a trash bag.

To use the trash holder:

1. Raise the trash holder.

2. Fit the grocery bag onto the holder by

hanging its handles on the two hooks

indicated at the left and right.

The trash holder can support to 1 kg

(2.20 lb.).

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, keep the trash holder

closed when it is not in use.

If the trash holder is pulled strongly or

stepped on, it will detach from the rear

console box to protect it from damag-

ing.

If the trash holder becomes detached, re-

install it in a horizontal direction as indi-

cated in the illustration. It cannot be

installed in any other direction.

NOTICE

Do not deliberately pull or step on

the trash holder, as it may be dam-

aged or broken.

Front cup holders

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

232

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink–cans securely.

The cup holder can be adjustable to the

size of the cups or drink–cans by

changing the holder position and the

arm position, as shown.

With the instrument panel lights on, the

front cup holder position indicator lights

will come on.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

cups or drink–cans in the cup holder,

as such items may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jured people in the vehicle during

sudden braking or in an accident.

1. To use the rear cup holders and tray,

pull the armrest out.

Rear cup holders and tray

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

233

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink–cans securely.

2. To use the rear cup holder, push and

pull it out.

3. To use the tray, pull it out.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other

than cups or drink–cans in the cup

holder, as such items may be

thrown about in the compartment

and possibly injure people in the

vehicle during sudden braking or in

an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop

while driving, keep the cup holder

closed when it is not in use.

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the tray closed

while driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the tray, do not

place any object heavier than 2 kg

(4.40 lb.) on it, and do not leave any

object on the tray for a long time.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

234

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Front doors

Rear doors

The bottle holders are designed to hold

bottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder for

any other purpose for which it was

intended. Inappropriately sized or

shaped objects may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jure people in the vehicle during a

sudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle in

the bottle holder because the con-

tents may spill when the door opens

or closes.

To secure your luggage, use the tie–

down hooks as shown above.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” on

page 253 in Section 2 for precautions

when loading luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie–

down hooks folded in place on the

floor when not in use.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors instead

of the tie–down hooks.

Bottle holders Tie–down hooks

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

235

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

These hooks are designed to hang

things like grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, do

not hang any object heavier than 1 kg

(2.20 lb.) in it.

These hooks are designed to hang the

cargo net.

To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net

hooks and rear tie–down hooks.

Although the cargo net itself is not in-

cluded as an original equipment, these

hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoid

hanging things other than a cargo net

on it.

Grocery bag hooks Cargo net hooks Luggage cover

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

236

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

USING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the luggage cover:

1. Attach the front hooks of the lug-

gage cover to the head restraint.

2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and

hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggage

cover. Such items may be thrown

about and possibly injure people in

the vehicle during sudden braking or

an accident. REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

To remove the luggage cover, detach its

hooks from the head restraint. Then,

retract and release both ends, and re-

move the luggage cover.

After you remove the luggage cover, place

it somewhere other than the passenger

compartment. This will prevent passengers

from injury in the event of a sudden stop

or accident.

To use the double deck:

1. Turn the left and right knobs from

the “LOCK” position to the

“UNLOCK” position.

Double deck

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

237

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Hold the handle and raise the double

deck on the rear tire houses. 3. Turn the left and right knobs from

the “UNLOCK” position to the

“LOCK” position.

Make sure the double deck is securely

locked.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop,

make sure that the double deck

knobs are always in the “LOCK” posi-

tion when the double deck is in the

raised or lowered position.

NOTICE

When using the double deck at the

raised position, do not place any ob-

ject heavier than 30 kg (66 lb.).

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

238

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The roof luggage carrier consists of

roof rails (1) attached to the roof and

sliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, do

this.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to

loosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desired

position for loading the luggages of

various sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the

cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and

precautions when installing the attach-

ments or their equivalent.

Paint mark

When there is no luggage on the roof

luggage carrier, Toyota recommends that

the front and rear cross rails be secured

in the positions indicated in the illustra-

tion, according to the following procedure.

This may diminish wind noise during driv-

ing.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to

loosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the ends of the cross rails to the

paint mark.

3. Be sure to tighten the cross rails by

turning knobs clockwise.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-

gage carrier, observe the following:

Place the cargo so that its weight

is distributed evenly between the

front and rear axles.

If loading long or wide cargo, never

exceed the vehicle overall length or

width. (See “Dimensions and cargo

load” on page 352 in Section 8 for

information on your vehicle overall

length and width.)

Before driving, make sure the cargo

is securely fastened on the roof

luggage carrier.

Loading cargo on the roof luggage

carrier will make the center of the

vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high

speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,

sudden braking or abrupt maneu-

vers, otherwise it may result in loss

of control or vehicle rollover due to

failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly.

Roof luggage carrier

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

239

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If driving for a long distance, on

rough roads, or at high speeds,

stop the vehicle now and then dur-

ing the trip to make sure the cargo

remains in its place.

Do not exceed 54 kg (120 lb.) cargo

weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be careful

not to scratch the surface of the

moon roof.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2

holes, then they are designed for use with

locking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock-

ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the floor carpet. If the floor

mat slips and interferes with the

movement of the pedals during driv-

ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

240

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

315

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Introduction

Engine compartment overview 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse locations 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Do–it–yourself service precautions 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts and tools 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

316

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Windshield and back window washer

fluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

Engine compartment overview

1GR–FE engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

317

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Windshield and back window washer

fluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil level dipstick

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

2UZ–FE engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

318

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Spare

fuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,

be sure to follow the correct procedure

given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-

complete servicing may result in operating

problems.

Performing do–it–yourself maintenance

during the warranty period may affect your

warranty coverage. Read the separate

Toyota Warranty statement for details and

suggestions.

This Section gives instructions only for

those items that are relatively easy for an

owner to perform. As explained in Section

6, there are still a number of items that

must be done by a qualified technician

with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do–

it–yourself maintenance, see “Parts and

tools” on page 320 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-

ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental

injury. Here are a few precautions that

you should be especially careful to ob-

serve:

Fuse locations Do–it–yourself service

precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

319

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, and tools away

from the moving fan and engine

drive belts. (Removing rings,

watches, and ties is advisable.)

Right after driving, the engine

compartment—the engine, radiator,

exhaust manifold, power steering

fluid reservoir and spark plug

boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-

ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids

and spark plugs may also be hot.

If the engine is hot, do not remove

the radiator cap or loosen the drain

plugs to prevent burning yourself.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames around fuel or the

battery. Their fumes are flammable.

Do not get under your vehicle with

just the body jack supporting it. Al-

ways use automotive jack stands or

other solid supports.

Use eye protection whenever you

work on or under your vehicle

where you may be exposed to flying

or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

Used engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as in-

flammation or skin cancer, so care

should be taken to avoid prolonged

and repeated contact with it. To re-

move used engine oil from your

skin, wash thoroughly with soap

and water.

Do not leave used oil within the

reach of children.

Dispose of used oil and filter only

in a safe and acceptable manner.

Do not dispose of used oil and fil-

ter in household trash, in sewers or

onto the ground. Call your dealer or

a service station for information

concerning recycling or disposal.

Be extremely cautious when work-

ing on the battery. It contains poi-

sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals

and related accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE



Remember that battery and ignition

cables carry high currents or volt-

ages. Be careful of accidentally

causing a short circuit.



Add only demineralized or distilled

water to fill the radiator. And if you

spill some of the coolant, be sure

to wash it off with water to prevent

it from damaging the parts or paint.



Do not allow dirt or anything else

to fall through the spark plug holes.



Use only spark plugs of the speci-

fied type. Using other types will

cause engine damage, loss of per-

formance or radio noise.



Do not reuse iridium–tipped spark

plugs by cleaning or regapping.



Do not overfill automatic transmis-

sion fluid, or the transmission

could be damaged.



Do not drive with the air cleaner

filter removed, or excessive engine

wear could result. Also backfiring

could cause a fire in the engine

compartment.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

320

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)



Be careful not to scratch the glass

surface with the wiper frame.



When closing the engine hood,

check to see that you have not for-

gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will

need to perform do–it–yourself mainte-

nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-

signed in metric sizes, so your tools must

be metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-

lent

See page 325 in Section 7–2 for de-

tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or

equivalent

See page 326 in Section 7–2 for de-

tails about coolant type selection.

Demineralized or distilled water

Tools:

Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

brake fluid

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

Automatic transmission fluid

DEXRONII or III

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

Warm water

Baking soda

Grease

Conventional wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

Parts and tools

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

321

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Fuse with same amperage rating as

original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

Water

Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for

winter use)

Tools:

Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

Bulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in “Re-

placing light bulbs” on page 344 in

Section 7–3.)

Tools:

Screwdriver

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

322

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

323

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine and Chassis

Checking the engine oil level 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the engine coolant level 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the radiator and condenser 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking brake fluid 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking power steering fluid 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking tire pressure 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing tires 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rotating tires 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing snow tires and chains 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing wheels 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aluminum wheel precautions 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

324

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

1GR–FE engine

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

2UZ–FE engine

With the engine at operating tempera-

ture and turned off, check the oil level

on the dipstick.

1. To get a true reading, the vehicle

should be on a level ground. After turn-

ing off the engine, wait a few minutes

for the oil to drain back into the bottom

of the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under

the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far

as it will go, or the reading will not be

correct.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil

level while holding a rag under the

end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-

haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop the engine oil

on the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightly

above the low level, add engine oil of

the same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine

oil in small quantities at a time, checking

the dipstick. We recommend that you use

a funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to

fill between the low level and the full level

on the dipstick is indicated below for ref-

erence.

When the level reaches within the correct

range, install the filler cap hand–tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):

1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE



Be careful not to spill the engine

oil on the vehicle components.



Avoid overfilling, or the engine

could be damaged.



Check the oil level on the dipstick

once again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

325

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and

viscosity.

Oil grade:

API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:

SAE 5W–30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W–30 is the best choice for good

fuel economy and good starting in cold

weather.

If SAE 5W–30 is not available, SAE

10W–30 may be used. However, it

should be replaced with SAE 5W–30 at

the next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

326

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks are

added to some oil containers to help

you select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-

where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oil

quality by API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) designations such as SL. The center

portion of the label shows the SAE viscos-

ity grade such as SAE 5W–30. “Energy–

Conserving” shown in the lower portion,

indicates that the oil has fuel–saving ca-

pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-

dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-

fication Mark is displayed on the front of

the container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-

mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine

Motor Oil” is available, which has been

specifically tested and approved for all

Toyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor

Oil”.

Look at the see–through coolant reser-

voir when the engine is cold. The cool-

ant level is satisfactory if it is between

the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.

If the level is low, add ethylene–glycol

type coolant for a proper corrosion

protection of aluminum components.

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary

with engine temperature. However, if the

level is on or below the “L” line, add

coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

Always use ethylene–glycol type coolant

for a proper corrosion protection of alumi-

num components. See information in the

next column.

If the coolant level drops within a short

time after replenishing, there may be a

leak in the system. Visually check the

radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain

cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota

dealer test the cap pressure and check

for leaks in the cooling system.

Checking the engine coolant

level

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

327

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

remove the radiator cap when the en-

gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage

your engine cooling system. Your coolant

must contain ethylene–glycol type coolant

for proper corrosion protection of your

engine that contains aluminum

components.

We have used “Toyota Genuine Long Life

Coolant” in your Toyota vehicle. In order

to avoid technical problems, we strongly

recommend using “Toyota Genuine Long

Life Coolant” or equivalent.

In addition to preventing freezing and

subsequent damage to the engine, this

type of coolant will also prevent corrosion.

Further supplemental inhibitors or additives

are neither needed nor recommended.

Read the coolant container for information

on freeze protection. Follow the manufac-

turer’s directions for how much to mix

with plain water (preferably demineralized

water or distilled water). The total capacity

of the cooling system is given on page

353 in Section 8.

We recommend a 50% solution for your

Toyota, to provide protection down to

about –35C (–31F). When it is extreme-

ly cold, to provide protection down to

about –50C (–58F), a 60% solution is

recommended. Do not use more than 70%

solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or

plain water alone.

The engine cooling system is integral to

maximizing performance of your Toyota

vehicle. In line with this, it is strongly

recommended that you use “Toyota

Genuine Long Life Coolant” for protecting

the system, as it is an ethylene–glycol

based premium antifreeze coolant with

excellent corrosion protection properties

that has been specifically formulated for

use in Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details about “Toyota Genuine Long

Life Coolant”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

328

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If any of the above parts are extremely

dirty or you are not sure of their condi-

tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-

ful not to touch the radiator or con-

denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator

and condenser, do not perform the

work by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look at

the see–through reservoir. The level

should be between the “MAX” and

“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go

down slightly as the brake pads wear or

when the fluid level in the accumulator is

high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it

may indicate a serious mechanical prob-

lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the

brake reservoir.

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40

times.

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.

Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above,

the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once

opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air, and excess moisture can cause a

dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir

because brake fluid can harm your

eyes and damage painted surfaces. If

fluid gets in your eyes, flush your

eyes with clean water immediately. If

you still feel uncomfortable with your

eyes, go to the doctor.

Checking the radiator and

condenser Checking brake fluid

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

329

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash

it off with water to prevent it from

damaging the parts or paint.

If cold O.K. If hot O.K.

If cold

add

If hot

add

Close Open

Check the fluid level through the reser-

voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-

mission fluid DEXRONII or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80

km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little

more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is

hot (60C—80C or 140F—175F). You

may also check the level when the fluid

is cold (about room temperature,

10C—30C or 50F—85F) if the engine

has not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoir

tank and look at the fluid level. If the fluid

is cold, the level should be in the “COLD”

range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level

should be in the “HOT” range. If the level

is at the low side of either range, add

automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII

or III to bring the level within the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-

terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,

turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-

voir cap, visually check the steering box

case, vane pump and hose connections

for leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so be

careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-

ing could be damaged.

Checking power steering fluid

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

330

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The air conditioning filter is behind the

glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-

ter long use. The filter may need to be

replaced if the air flow of the air condi-

tioning and heater experiences extreme

reductions in operating efficiency, or if

the windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,

inspect and replace the air conditioning

filter according to the maintenance sched-

ule. (For scheduled maintenance informa-

tion, please refer to the “Scheduled Main-

tenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.)

1. Open the glove box. Remove the

screw with a Phillips–head screw-

driver and slide the hook as shown.

2. Push each side of the glove box to

disconnect the claws.

Checking and replacing the

air conditioning filter

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

331

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

3. Remove the filter case by holding

both sides. 4. Remove the filter from the filter

case.

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is the just moderately dusty, it may

be cleaned by blowing compressed air

from the reverse surface. Do not wash or

oil the filter.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When setting the filter to the filter case,

ensure that the flat side of the filter is

down and the ribbed side is up.

Position the filter case so that the “↑UP”

mark is pointing up and install it in the

vehicle.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-

erly in position. The use of air condi-

tioning with the air filter removed

may cause deteriorated dustproof per-

formance and then affect air condi-

tioning performance.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

332

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Keep your tire pressures at the proper

level.

The recommended cold tire pressures, tire

size and the cargo load are given on

pages 352 and 356 in Section 8. They are

also on the tire pressure label as shown.

You should check the tire pressure every

two weeks, or at least once a month. And

don’t forget the spare!

Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel,

reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire

life and make your vehicle less safe to

drive.

If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it

checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Keep your tire pressure properly in-

flated. Otherwise, the following condi-

tions may occur and cause an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious in-

juries.

Low tire pressure (underinflation)—

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

Poor handling

Possibility of blowouts from over-

heated tire

Poor sealing of the tire bead

Wheel deformation and/or tire sepa-

ration

High tire pressure (overinflation)—

Poor handling

Excessive wear at the center of the

tire tread

A greater possibility of tire damage

from road hazards

Checking tire pressure

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

333

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The following instructions for checking

tire pressure should be observed:

The pressure should be checked only

when the tires are cold. If your ve-

hicle has been packed for at least 3

hours and has not been driven for

more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you

will get an accurate cold tire pressure

reading.

Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of a tire can be mis-

leading. Besides, tire pressures that

are even just a few pounds off can

degrade ride and handling.

Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure

after driving. It is normal for the tire

pressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity

weight. The passenger and luggage

weight should be located so that the

vehicle is balanced.

Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation

valve caps. Without the valve caps,

dirt or moisture could get into the valve

core and cause air leakage. If the caps

have been lost, have new ones put on

as soon as possible.

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire tread for the tread wear

indicators. If the indicators show, re-

place the tires.

The tires on your Toyota have built–in

tread wear indicators to help you know

when the tires need replacement. When

the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06

in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If

you can see the indicators in two or more

adjacent grooves, the tire should be re-

placed. The lower the tread, the higher

the risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost

if the tread wears down below 4 mm

(0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as cuts,

splits, cracks deep enough to expose

the fabric, or bulges indicating internal

damage, the tire should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be prop-

erly repaired due to the size or location

of a cut or other damage, it should be

replaced. If you are not sure, consult with

your Toyota dealer.

If an air loss occurs while driving, do not

continue driving with a deflated tire. Driv-

ing even a short distance can damage a

tire beyond repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years old

must be checked by a qualified techni-

cian even if damage is not obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if they

have never or seldom been used.

This also applies to the spare tire and

tires stored for future use.

Checking and replacing tires

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

334

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use a tire of the

same size and construction, and the

same or greater load capacity as the

originally installed tires. Also, on four–

wheel drive models, all the tires must

be the same brand and have the same

tread patterns.

Using any other size or type of tire may

seriously affect handling, ride, speedome-

ter/odometer calibration, ground clearance,

and clearance between the body and tires

or snow chains.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not mix radial, bias belted, or

bias–ply tires on your vehicle, as

this may cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in loss of

control.

Do not use tires other than the

manufacturer’s recommended size,

as this may cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Four–wheel drive models:

Do not use tires of different brands,

sizes, construction or tread pat-

terns, as this may cause dangerous

handling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or at

least both front or rear tires be re-

placed as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page 283

in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel

should always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Wheels can get out

of balance with regular use and should

therefore be balanced occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the air

valve should also be replaced with a

new one.

To equalize the wear and help extend

tire life, Toyota recommends that you

rotate your tires according to the main-

tenance schedule. (For scheduled main-

tenance information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) Howev-

er, the most appropriate timing for tire

rotation may vary according to your

driving habits and road surface condi-

tions.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page 283

in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

Rotating tires

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

335

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usu-

ally caused by incorrect tire pressure, im-

proper wheel alignment, out–of–balance

wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR

CHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommended

when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires

provide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires of

the same size, construction and load

capacity as the originally installed tires.

Also, on four–wheel drive models, all

the tires must be the same brand and

have the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-

tioned above. Do not install studded tires

without first checking local regulations for

possible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use snow tires other than

the manufacturer’s recommended si-

ze, as this may cause dangerous

handling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Four–wheel drive models:

Do not use snow tires of different

brands, sizes, construction or tread

patterns, as this may cause danger-

ous handling characteristics result-

ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all

wheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheels

only can lead to an excessive difference

in road grip capability between the front

and rear tires which could cause loss of

vehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you should

store them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure

to install them in the same direction when

replacing.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the snow tires

incorrectly inflated.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)

with any type of snow tires.

Installing snow tires and

chains

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

336

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tire

chains vary according to location or

type of road, so always check the local

regulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires as

tightly as possible. Do not use tire

chains on the front tires. Retighten

chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km

(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-

fully follow the instructions of the chain

manufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will be

scratched by the chain band, so remove

the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

the chain manufacturer’s recom-

mended speed limit, whichever is

lower.

Drive carefully avoiding bumps,

holes, and sharp turns, which may

cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked–wheel

braking, as use of chains may ad-

versely affect vehicle handling.

When driving with chains installed,

be sure to drive carefully. Slow

down before entering curves to

avoid losing control of the vehicle.

Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such as

bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the

wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,

the tire may slip off the wheel or cause

loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should be

taken to ensure that the wheels are re-

placed by ones with the same load ca-

pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are available

at your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may

adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-

ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-

eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight

aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-

ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to

the body and chassis.

Replacing wheels

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

337

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-

ommended as they may have been sub-

jected to rough treatment or high mileage

and could fail without warning. Also, bent

wheels which have been straightened may

have structural damage and therefore

should not be used. Never use an inner

tube in a leaking wheel which is designed

for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use wheels other than the

manufacturer’s recommended size,

as this may cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Four–wheel drive models:

Do not use wheels of different

brands, sizes and types, as this

may cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in loss of

control.

When installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tight

after driving your vehicle the first 1600

km (1000 miles).

If you have rotated, repaired or

changed your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving

1600 km (1000 miles).

When using tire chains, be careful not

to damage the aluminum wheels.

Use only the Toyota wheel nuts and

wrench designed for your aluminum

wheels.

When balancing your wheels, use only

Toyota balance weights or equivalent

and a plastic or rubber hammer.

As with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If

damaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

338

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

339

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Electrical components

Checking battery condition 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery recharging precautions 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing fuses 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding washer fluid 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing light bulbs 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION

–

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

340

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable and

explosive hydrogen gas.

Do not cause a spark from the bat-

tery with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near

the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin or

clothes.

Never ingest electrolyte.

Wear protective safety glasses when

working near the battery.

Keep children away from the bat-

tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

If electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean water

immediately and get immediate

medical attention. If possible, con-

tinue to apply water with a sponge

or cloth while en route to the medi-

cal office.

If electrolyte gets on your skin,

thoroughly wash the contact area. If

you feel pain or burning, get medi-

cal attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes,

there is a possibility of its soaking

through to your skin, so immediate-

ly take off the exposed clothing and

follow the procedure above, if nec-

essary.

If you accidentally swallow electro-

lyte, drink a large quantity of water

or milk. Follow with milk of magne-

sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable

oil. Then go immediately for emer-

gency help.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals

and related accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Wash hands after handling.

Terminals

Hold–down

clamp

Ground cable

Check the battery for corroded or loose

terminal connections, cracks, or loose

hold–down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off

with a solution of warm water and bak-

ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-

nals with grease to prevent further cor-

rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,

tighten their clamp nuts—but do not

overtighten.

c. Tighten the hold–down clamp only

enough to keep the battery firmly in

place. Overtightening may damage the

battery case.

Checking battery condition—

—Precautions —Checking battery exterior

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

341

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE



Be sure the engine and all accesso-

ries are off before performing main-

tenance.



When checking the battery, remove

the ground cable from the negative

terminal (“–” mark) first and rein-

stall it last.



Be careful not to cause a short cir-

cuit with tools.



Take care no solution gets into the

battery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the power window, power back win-

dow and moon roof may not operate auto-

matically and the jam protection function

will not function correctly, and does not

open the back door after you reconnect,

replace or recharge the battery. In any of

these cases, you should normalize the

power window, power back window, back

door and moon roof. To normalize them,

see “Power windows” on page 23, “Power

back window” on page 26, “Back door” on

page 29 and “Electric moon roof” on page

35 in Section 1–2.

Type A

Type B

Green Dark Clear or light

yellow

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-

cator color.

Indicator color

Condition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.

Have battery

checked by your

Toyota dealer.

Clear or

light

yellow

Red Have battery

checked by your

Toyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-

ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed

on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect

the ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-

charger is off when connecting the

charger cables to the battery and when

disconnecting them.

CAUTION

Always charge the battery in an un-

confined area. Do not charge the

battery in a garage or closed room

where there is not sufficient ventila-

tion.

Only do a slow charge (5 A or

less). Charging at a quicker rate is

dangerous. The battery may ex-

plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while the

engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

342

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good

Blown

If the headlights or other electrical

components do not work, check the

fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,

they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 318 in Sec-

tion 7–1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperative

component off. Pull a suspected fuse

straight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing the

problem. The lid of the fuse box shows

the name of the circuit for each fuse. See

page 356 in Section 8 of this manual for

the functions controlled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by using

the pull–out tool. The location of the pull–

out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has

blown, try replacing the suspected fuse

with one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse

into the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-

ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an

emergency you can pull out the “PWR

OUTLET” or “HEATER NO.2” fuse, which

may be dispensable for normal driving,

and use it if its amperage rating is the

same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-

age, use one that is lower, but as close

as possible to the rating. If the amperage

is lower than that specified, the fuse

might blow out again but this does not

indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get

the correct fuse as soon as possible and

return the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of

spare fuses and keep them in your ve-

hicle for emergencies.

Checking and replacing fuses

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

343

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the new fuse immediately blows out,

there is a problem with the electrical sys-

tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-

perage rating, or any other object, in

place of a fuse. This may cause ex-

tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work, the wash-

er tank may be empty. Check the wash-

er fluid level on the level gauge. If the

washer fluid level is below “LOW” or

only slightly above the “LOW” level,

add washer fluid.

For vehicles sold in Canada—

If any washer does not work or low

windshield washer fluid level warning

light comes on, the washer tank may be

empty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.

However, in cold areas where tempera-

tures range below freezing point, use

washer fluid containing antifreeze. This

product is available at your Toyota dealer

and most auto parts stores. Follow the

manufacturer’s directions for how much to

mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

Adding washer fluid

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

344

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The following illustrations show how to

gain access to the bulbs. When replacing

a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and

light switch are off. Use bulbs with the

wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

replace the light bulbs while they

are hot.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and require special handling.

They can burst or shatter if

scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb

only by its plastic or metal case.

Do not touch the glass part of a

bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights

such as headlights may temporarily fog up

when the lens becomes wet in the rain or

in a car wash. This is not a problem

because the fogging is caused by the

temperature difference between the outside

and inside of the lens, just like the

windshield fogged up in the rain. However,

if there is a large drop of water on the

inside of the lens, or if there is water

pooled inside the light, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Replacing light bulbs—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

345

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

A: HB3 halogen bulbs

B: HB4 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

E: Double end bulbs

9005

TypeWBulb No.Light bulbs

Headlights (high beam)

Headlights (high and low beams)

Front fog lights

Parking and front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights

(without daytime running light system)

Front turn signal lights

(with daytime running light system)

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Back–up lights

License plate lights

High mounted stoplight

Interior light

Personal lights

Vanity lights

Door courtesy lights

Glove box light

Luggage compartment light

Running board lights

9006

168

—

921

—

921

168

—

4157NAK

27/8

21/5

3.8

1.2

3.8

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

346

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Low beam

(outside)

High beam

(inside)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise

to the front of the vehicle as shown. 2. Unplug the connector while depress-

ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connector

into the mounting hole and turn

them clockwise to the front of the

vehicle.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-

essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Headlights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

347

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise

to the front of the vehicle as shown. 2. Unplug the connector while depress-

ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connector

into the mounting hole and turn

them clockwise to the front of the

vehicle.

—Front fog lights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

348

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Use a flat–bladed screwdriver which is

wrapped with a cloth.

—Parking and front side

marker lights —Front turn signal lights

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail,

rear side marker and back–up

lights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

349

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

a: Rear turn signal light

b: Stop/tail and rear side marker light

c: Back–up light

Use a Phillips–head screwdriver.

Clips

Disconnect the clips by using a flat–

bladed screwdriver which is wrapped with

a cloth.

—License plate lights —High mounted stoplight

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

350

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Check one: ■■Same owner, name and/or address has changed ■■New owner, purchased vehicle used

■■Same owner, additional driver who should receive product/safety updates

■■Mr. ■■Mrs. ■■Ms. ■■Miss ■■Dr.

Owner Information Change Form

EVV

First name M.I. Last name

Company name

Street address or P.O. Box Apt. or suite number

City State Zip code

Home phone number Work phone number Extension

Vehicle Identification Number (required to process change) Mo. Day Year

–

–– ––

––

Check here if

address below

is for company ■■

This information is obtained solely for the use of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

Toyota occasionally sends special promotional offers to registered owners. Check here if you prefer not to receive these offers. ■■

Effective date of

this information

Social Security Number

(optional; for Toyota customer reference only)

2003

00452-02003-REV1 Printed in U.S.A. 11/02

www.toyota.com

Owner’s

Warranty

Information

If your name

or address has

changed or you

purchased your

Toyota as a used

vehicle, please

complete and

mail the attached

card, even if your

warranty coverage

has expired. This

will enable Toyota

to contact you

with important

product or safety

updates concern-

ing your vehicle.

If the card is no

longer attached,

please call the

Toyota Customer

Assistance Center at

(800) 331-4331.

Table of Contents

Introduction

Satisfaction Down the Road 2

Transportation Assistance 3

If You Need Assistance 4

Warranty Coverages at a Glance 6

Your Warranties in Detail

General Warranty Provisions 7

New Vehicle Limited Warranty 9

Federal Emission Control Warranty 14

California Emission Control Warranty 20

Tire Limited Warranty 26

Your Responsibilities

Operation and Maintenance 27

Obtaining Warranty Service 29

tToyota, our top priority is always our customers. We know

your Toyota is an important part of your life and something you

depend on every day. That’s why we’re dedicated to building

products of the highest quality and reliability.

Our excellent warranty coverage is evidence that we stand behind the

quality of our vehicles. We’re confident — as you should be — that your

Toyota will provide you with many years of enjoyable driving.

To further demonstrate our commitment to our customers’ satisfaction,

occasionally we may establish a special policy adjustment to pay for spe-

cific repairs that are no longer covered by warranty. When we establish

such a policy adjustment, we mail details to all applicable owners we

have on record. That’s why it’s important to send in the card at the back

of this booklet if you change your address or if you’ve purchased this

vehicle from a previous owner.

To provide you with added protection against unexpected service costs,

we offer Toyota Extra Care vehicle service agreements and Toyota Auto

Care pre-paid maintenance programs. Both offer plans to meet a wide

variety of needs. Your dealership can help you select the plan that’s best

for you.

Our goal is for every Toyota customer to enjoy outstanding quality,

dependability and peace of mind throughout their ownership experi-

ence. We want you to be a satisfied member of the Toyota family for

many miles to come.

This booklet describes the terms of Toyota warranty coverage

as well as general owner responsibilities. A separate publication

found in your glove box, the Scheduled Maintenance Guide,

describes your vehicle’s maintenance requirements. Be sure to

review this publication carefully, since proper maintenance is

required to ensure that warranty coverage remains intact.

All information in this booklet is the latest available at the time of pub-

lication and, with the exception of the emission control warranties, is

subject to change without notice.

Introduction

Satisfaction Down the Road

e realize that your confidence in the quality and reliability

of our products was a key factor in your decision to buy a

Toyota. We also know how disruptive the loss of transportation

can be to your daily routine. That’s why we’re pleased to offer you the

benefits of our Transportation Assistance Policy.

Under this policy, you are eligible for transportation assistance if your

Toyota must be kept overnight for warranty-covered repairs. The policy

applies when your vehicle must be kept overnight for any of the follow-

ing reasons:

•The warranty repairs will take longer than one day to complete.

•The warrantable condition requires extensive diagnosis.

•The parts needed for the warranty repairs are not readily available

and your vehicle is inoperative or unsafe to drive.

The policy does not apply when warranty repairs can be completed

in one day but the vehicle must be kept overnight due to dealer or

owner scheduling conflicts.

The Transportation Assistance Policy applies for the duration of the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. The policy applies to all 2003 model-year

Toyotas sold and serviced by authorized Toyota dealerships in the

mainland United States and Alaska.

For further details, please consult your Toyota dealer.

Introduction 3

Transportation Assistance

Both Toyota and your Toyota dealer are dedicated to serving your

automotive needs. Your complete satisfaction is our first priority. Should

you have a problem or concern — either during or after the warranty

period — please take the following steps to ensure the quickest possible

response:

Step 1

Discuss the situation with a dealership manager, such as the service

manager or customer relations manager. In most cases, a satisfactory

solution can be reached at this step.

Step 2

If the dealership does not address your concern to your satisfaction,

call the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at (800)331–4331. If you

are hearing- or speech-impaired, call (800)443-4999 (TDD).

Please have the following information ready when you call:

•Your Toyota’s vehicle identification number (located on the

driver’s side corner of the dashboard, under the window)

•Current mileage on your vehicle

•Name of your Toyota dealership

AToyota customer relations representative will assist you in

working with the dealership to find a satisfactory solution.

Step 3

If your concern has still not been resolved to your satisfaction, Toyota

offers additional assistance through the Dispute Settlement Program,

a dispute resolution program administered by the National Center for

Dispute Settlement. The purpose of the Dispute Settlement Program

is to resolve disputes through arbitration — a process by which two

parties authorize an independent third party to hear and resolve a dis-

pute. The program is informal and free of charge. To request that your

If You Need Assistance

Introduction

case be reviewed through the program, complete the customer claim

form in the Owner's Warranty Rights Notification booklet (found in your

glove box) and mail it to:

National Center for Dispute Settlement

P.O. Box 561109

Dallas, TX 75356-1109

If you would like to request a customer claim form, call the Toyota

Customer Assistance Center at (800)331-4331. When you call, please

have your vehicle identification number, the current mileage on your

Toyota and the names of your selling and servicing dealerships.

Important: You must use the Dispute Settlement Program before seeking

remedies through a court action pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss

Warranty Act. You may also be required to use the Dispute Settlement

Program before seeking remedies under the “Lemon Laws” of your state.

Please check the appropriate page of the Owner’s Warranty Rights

Notification booklet for the requirements applicable to your state.

This information about the Dispute Settlement Program is correct

as of the date of printing. However, the program may be changed

without notice. For the most current information about the Dispute

Settlement Program, call the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at

(800)331-4331.

Introduction 5

If You Need Assistance

10 months

months

20 30 40 50 60 70 80

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

36 months / 36,000 miles

60 months / 60,000 miles

60 months / Unlimited miles

Basic

Powertrain

Restraint Systems

Corrosion Perforation

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emission Control Warranty

24 months / 24,000 miles

1 Specific components may have longer coverage under terms of the Powertrain Warranty.

36 months / 36,000 miles1

96 months / 80,000 miles

36 months / 50,000 miles

36 months / 50,000 miles1

84 months / 70,000 miles

Performance

Specific Components

Defect

Specific Components

Performance

Short-Term Defect

Long-Term Defect

FederalCalifornia2,3

2 Also applies to Massachusetts and Vermont vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control System.

Vehicles covered by this warranty are also covered by the Federal Emission Control Warranty.

3 For 4-cylinder Camry models certified as partial zero-emission vehicles (PZEV),

if any, coverage is 15 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Introduction

Warranty Coverages at a Glance

Who Is the Warrantor

The warrantor for these limited warranties is Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,

Inc. (“Toyota”), 19001 South Western Avenue, Torrance, California

90509-2991, a California corporation.

Which Vehicles Are Covered

These warranties apply to all 2003 model-year vehicles registered and

normally operated in the United States, U.S. territories and Canada.

Warranty coverage is automatically transferred at no cost to subsequent

vehicle owners.

Multiple Warranty Conditions

This booklet contains warranty terms and conditions that may vary

depending on the part covered. A warranty for specific parts or systems,

such as the Powertrain Warranty or Emission Performance Warranty, is

governed by the coverage set forth in that warranty as well as the

General Warranty Provisions.

When Warranty Begins

The warranty period begins on the vehicle’s in-service date, which is the

first date the vehicle is either delivered to an ultimate purchaser, leased,

or used as a company car or demonstrator.

Repairs Made at No Charge

Repairs and adjustments covered by these warranties are made at no

charge forparts and labor.

Parts Replacement

Any needed parts replacement will be made using new or remanufac-

tured parts. The decision whether a part should be repaired or replaced

will be made by the servicing Toyota dealership and/or Toyota. Parts

scheduled to be replaced as required maintenance are warranted until

their first replacement only.

Your Warranties in Detail 7

General Warranty Provisions

Limitations

The performance of necessary repairs and adjustments is the exclusive

remedy under these warranties or any implied warranties. Toyota does

not authorize any person to create foritany other obligation or liability

in connection with this vehicle.

Any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular

purpose is limited to the duration of these written warranties.

Some states do not allow restrictions on how long an implied warranty

lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you.

Your Rights Under State Law

These warranties give you specific legal rights. You may also have other

rights that vary from state to state.

Your Warranties in Detail

General Warranty Provisions

Basic Warranty

This warranty covers repairs and adjustments needed to correct defects in

materials or workmanship of any part supplied by Toyota, subject to the

exceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” on pages 11–12.

Coverage is for 36 months or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, with

the exception of wheel alignment and wheel balancing, which are cov-

ered for 12 months or 20,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Powertrain Warranty

This warranty covers repairs needed to correct defects in materials or

workmanship of any component listed in the next column and supplied

by Toyota, subject to the exceptions indicated under “What Is Not

Covered” on pages 11–12.

Coverage is for 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Engine

Cylinder block and head and all internal parts, intake manifold, timing

gears and gaskets, timing chain/belt and cover, flywheel, valve covers,

oil pan, oil pump, engine mounts, turbocharger housing and all internal

parts, supercharger housing and all internal parts, engine control com-

puter, water pump, fuel pump, seals and gaskets.

Transmission and Transaxle

Case and all internal parts, torque converter, clutch cover, transmission

mounts, transfer case and all internal parts, engine control computer,

seals and gaskets.

Front-Wheel-Drive System

Final drive housing and all internal parts, axle shafts, drive shafts,

constant velocity joints, front hub and bearings, seals and gaskets.

Rear-Wheel-Drive System

Axle housing and all internal parts, propeller shafts, U-joints, axle

shafts, drive shafts, bearings, supports, seals and gaskets.

WHAT IS COVERED AND HOW LONG

Your Warranties in Detail 9

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Corrosion Perforation Warranty

This warranty covers repair or replacement of any original body panel

that develops perforation from corrosion (rust-through), subject to the

exceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” on pages 11–12.

Coverage is for 60 months, regardless of mileage.

For information on how to protect yourvehicle from corrosion, see the

section entitled “Corrosion Prevention and Appearance Care” in the

Owner’s Manual.

Restraint Systems Warranty

This warranty covers repairs needed to correct defects in materials or

workmanship of any seatbelt or airbag system supplied by Toyota,

subject to the exceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” on

pages 11–12.

Coverage is for 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

For vehicles sold and registered in the state of Kansas, the warranty for

seatbelts and related components is 10 years, regardless of mileage.

Towing

When your vehicle is inoperable due to failure of a warranted part,

towing service to the nearest authorized Toyota dealership is covered.

Your Warranties in Detail

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

This warranty does not cover damage or failures resulting directly or

indirectly from any of the following:

•Fire, accidents or theft

•Abuse or negligence

•Misuse — for example, racing or overloading

•Improper repairs

•Alteration or tampering, including installation of non-Genuine

Toyota Accessories

•Lack of or improper maintenance, including use of fluids other

than those specified in the Owner’s Manual

•Installation of non-Genuine Toyota Parts

•Airborne chemicals, tree sap, road debris (including stone chips),

rail dust, salt, hail, floods, wind storms, lightning and other

environmental conditions

•Water contamination

This warranty also does not cover the following:

Tires

Tires are covered by a separate warranty provided by the tire manufac-

turer. See page 26.

Normal Wear and Tear

Noise, vibration, cosmetic conditions and other deterioration caused by

normal wear and tear.

Maintenance Expense

Normal maintenance services such as:

•Engine tune-ups

•Replacement of fluids and filters

•Lubrication

•Cleaning and polishing

•Replacement of spark plugs and fuses

•Replacement of worn wiper blades, brake pads/linings and clutch linings

WHAT IS NOT COVERED

Your Warranties in Detail 11

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Maintenance Expense

Normal maintenance services such as:

•Engine tune-ups

•Replacement of fluids and filters

•Lubrication

•Cleaning and polishing

•Replacement of spark plugs and fuses

•Replacement of worn wiper blades, brake pads/linings and clutch linings

Noise, vibration, cosmetic conditions and other deterioration caused by

normal wear and tear.

Normal Wear and Tear

Tires are covered by a separate warranty provided by the tire manufac-

turer. See page 26.

Vehicles With Altered Odometer

Failure of a vehicle on which the odometer has been altered so that

actual vehicle mileage cannot be readily determined.

Salvage or Total-Loss Vehicles

Any vehicle that has ever been issued a “salvage” title or similar title

under any state’s law; or has ever been declared a “total loss” or equiva-

lent by a financial institution or insurer, such as by payment for a claim in

lieu of repairs because the cost of repairs exceeded the cash value of the

vehicle. This exclusion does not apply to the emission control warranties.

Incidental Damages

Incidental or consequential damages associated with a vehicle failure.

Such damages include but are not limited to inconvenience; the cost of

transportation, telephone calls and lodging; the loss of personal or com-

mercial property; and the loss of pay or revenue.

Disclaimer of Extra Expenses and Damages

The performance of necessary repairs and adjustments is the exclu-

sive remedy under this warranty or any implied warranty. Toyota

does not authorize any person to create foritany other obligation

or liability in connection with this vehicle. Toyota shall not be liable

forincidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of

this written warranty or any implied warranty. Any implied war-

ranty of merchantability or fitness fora particular purpose is limited

to the duration of this written warranty, except in states where this

limitation is not allowed.

Your Warranties in Detail

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

If a dispute arises regarding your warranty coverage, please follow the

steps described under “If You Need Assistance” on pages 4–5. Please

note that you must use the Dispute Settlement Program before seeking

remedies through a court action pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss

Warranty Act. You may also be required to use the Dispute Settlement

Program before seeking remedies under the “Lemon Laws” of your state.

Please check the appropriate page of the Owner’s Warranty Rights

Notification booklet (located in your glove box) for the requirements

applicable to your state.

Your Warranties in Detail 13

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

DISPUTE RESOLUTION

Emission Defect Warranty

Toyota warrants that your vehicle:

•Was designed, built and equipped to conform at the time of sale with

applicable federal emissions standards.

•Is free from defects in materials and workmanship that may cause the

vehicle to fail to meet these standards.

Federal regulations require that this warranty be in effect for two years

or 24,000 miles from the vehicle’s in-service date, whichever occurs

first. However, under the terms of the Basic Warranty, Toyota provides

coverage of three years or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first. Speci-

fic components may have longer coverage under the terms of the

Powertrain Warranty. Additionally, components marked “8/80” in the

parts list on pages 15–16 have coverage of eight years or 80,000 miles,

whichever occurs first.

Emission Performance Warranty

Some states and localities have established vehicle inspection and main-

tenance (I/M) programs to encourage proper vehicle maintenance. If an

EPA-approved I/M program is in force in your area, you are eligible for

Emission Performance Warranty coverage.

Under the terms of the Emission Performance Warranty and federal

regulations, Toyota will make all necessary repairs if both of the

following occur:

•Your vehicle fails to meet applicable emissions standards as

determined by an EPA-approved emissions test.

•This failure results or will result in some penalty to you — such

as a fine or denial of the right to use your vehicle — under local,

state or federal law.

This warranty is in effect for two years or 24,000 miles from the vehicle’s

in-service date, whichever occurs first. Additionally, components marked

“8/80” in the parts list on pages 15–16 have coverage of eight years or

80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

WHAT IS COVERED AND HOW LONG

Your Warranties in Detail

Federal Emission Control Warranty

These warranty obligations do not apply to failures or non-compliance

caused by:

•The use of replacement parts not certified in accordance with

aftermarket parts certification regulations.

•The use of replacement parts not equivalent in quality or design

to original equipment parts.

Provisions under the “What Is Not Covered” section of the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty also apply to this warranty.

Air/Fuel Metering System

•Air/fuel ratio feedback control system

•Cold-start enrichment system

•Deceleration control system

•Electronic fuel injection system components

—Airflow sensor

—Engine control module (8/80)

—Throttle body

—Other components

Air Induction System

•Intake manifold and intake air surge tank

Catalyst System

•Catalytic converter and protector (8/80)

•Constricted fuel filler neck

•Exhaust manifold

•Exhaust pipe (manifold to catalyst and/or catalyst to catalyst)

WHAT IS NOT COVERED WARRANTY PARTS LIST

8/80 = Covered for eight years or 80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Your Warranties in Detail 15

Federal Emission Control Warranty

Evaporative Control System

•Charcoal canister

•Diaphragm valve

•Fuel filler cap

•Fuel tank

•Vapor liquid separator

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System

•EGR gas temperature sensor

•EGR valve

•Associated parts

Ignition System

•Distributor and internal parts

•Ignition coil and ignitor

•Ignition wires

•Spark plugs*

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

•Oil filler cap

•PCV valve or orifice

Other Parts Used in Above Systems

•Data link connector (8/80)

•Hoses, clamps, fittings, tubing and mounting hardware

•Malfunction indicator light and bulb (8/80)

•Pulleys, belts and idlers

•Sealing gaskets and devices

•Sensors, switches and valves

Warranted until first required maintenance under terms of the

California Emission Control Warranty.

8/80 = Covered for eight years or 80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Your Warranties in Detail

Federal Emission Control Warranty

You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indi-

cated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.

Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not have

records to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, any failure

or noncompliance caused by lack of maintenance is not covered by this

warranty.

When maintenance and repairs are paid for by you, these services

may be performed by you or by any automotive service provider you

choose. Toyota will not deny a warranty claim simply because you

used a service provider other than a Toyota dealership for mainte-

nance and repairs. However, any failure or non-compliance caused by

improper maintenance or repairs is not covered by this warranty.

To ensure optimum performance and maintain the quality built into

your vehicle’s emission control systems, Toyota recommends the use of

Genuine Toyota Parts when servicing or repairing the systems.

Warranty coverage is not dependentupon the use of any particular

brand of replacement parts and you may elect to use non–Genuine

Toyota Parts for maintenance and repairs. However, use of replace-

ment parts that are not equivalent in quality to Genuine Toyota

Parts may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

If you use replacement parts that have maintenance or replacement

schedules different from those of Genuine Toyota Parts, you must follow

the maintenance and replacement schedules for the parts you are using.

In addition, you should ensure that such parts are warranted by their

manufacturers to be equivalent to Genuine Toyota Parts.

MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENT PARTS

Your Warranties in Detail 17

Federal Emission Control Warranty

If your vehicle fails an EPA-approved emissions test, you may make a

claim under the Emission Performance Warranty. To do so, take your

vehicle to an authorized Toyota dealership and present a copy of the

emissions test report. Also, take your maintenance records in case they

are needed.

If your claim qualifies for coverage, the dealership will repair your vehi-

cle within 30 days (unless a shorter period is required by law). If your

claim is denied, Toyota will notify you in writing of the reason within

the same period. If we fail to do so, we will repair your vehicle free of

charge. The only exceptions allowed are when you request or agree to a

delay, or a delay is caused by factors beyond the control of Toyota or the

dealership.

For information on how to obtain service under the Emission Defect

Warranty, see page 29, “Obtaining Warranty Service.”

If you have questions or concerns about your vehicle’s federal emission

warranty coverage, please follow the steps described under “If You Need

Assistance” on pages 4–5. In the case of the Emission Performance

Warranty, you may also request information from or report complaints to:

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

Vehicle Programs & Compliance Division (6405J)

Attn: Warranty Complaints

401 M Street SW

Washington, D.C. 20460

Vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control System

that are registered and operated in California or any state that

adopts California emission warranty provisions are also covered by

the California Emission Control Warranty (see page 20). Currently,

Massachusetts and Vermont are the only other states to which the

California Emission Control Warranty applies.

IF YOUR VEHICLE FAILS AN EMISSIONS TEST IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS

Your Warranties in Detail

Federal Emission Control Warranty

We (the dealership) want you to know that at the time your new Toyota

vehicle is being delivered:

1) On the basis of written notification furnished by Toyota, we have

knowledge that the vehicle is covered by an EPA Certificate of

Conformity.

2) We have visually inspected those emission control devices or portions

thereof that are visible without removing or adjusting any compo-

nents or systems, emissions-related or otherwise. On the basis of this

inspection, there are no apparent deficiencies in the installation of

emission control devices by Toyota. (For purposes of this certificate,

“emission control devices” is limited to devices installed on a vehicle

forthe sole or primary purpose of controlling emissions and which

were not in general use before 1968.)

3) We have performed all emission control system preparations required

by Toyota prior to the sale of the vehicle as set forth in Toyota’s cur-

rent pre-delivery service manual.

4) Except as may be provided in Paragraph 5, if this vehicle fails an

EPA-approved emissions test within three months or 4,000 miles

(whichever comes first) of delivery to the ultimate purchaser, and the

vehicle has been maintained and used in accordance with the writ-

ten instructions for proper maintenance and use, Toyota will remedy

the non-conformity free of charge under the terms of the Emission

Performance Warranty.

5) If vehicle was used as a company car or demonstrator, check box and

complete the following:

□The vehicle with which this statement is delivered was placed

into service as a company car or demonstrator prior to delivery.

The Emission Performance Warranty period commenced on the

date the vehicle was first placed into service, which was:

Month Day Year

Note: The dealership makes no representation or warranty that the

emission control system or any part thereof is without defect or that

the system will perform properly. The Emission Performance Warranty

referred to in Paragraph 4 and furnished with the vehicle is solely that

of the manufacturer.

This statement is required by section 207 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C.

7541) and the EPA regulations issued thereunder.

Dealership Name

DEALER CERTIFICATE

Your Warranties in Detail 19

Federal Emission Control Warranty

The California Air Resources Board (CARB) and Toyota are pleased to

explain the emission control system warranty for your 2003 vehicle. In

California, new motor vehicles must be designed, built and equipped to

meet the state’s stringent anti-smog standards. CARB regulations require

that Toyota must warrant the emission control system on your vehicle for

the time periods indicated on this page, provided there has been no

abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your vehicle.

Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injection

system, ignition system, catalytic converter and engine computer. Also

included may be hoses, belts, connectors and other emissions-related

assemblies.

Where a warrantable condition exists, Toyota will repair your vehicle at

no cost to you, including diagnosis, parts and labor.

1) For three years or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first:*

•If your vehicle fails a smog-check test, all necessary repairs and

adjustments will be made by Toyota to ensure that your vehicle

passes the test. This is your Emission Control System PERFORMANCE

WARRANTY.

•If any emissions-related part on your vehicle is defective, the part

will be repaired or replaced by Toyota. This is your SHORT-TERM

Emission Control System DEFECT WARRANTY. Covered parts are listed

on pages 15–16. Specific components may have longer coverage

under the terms of the Powertrain Warranty.

2) For seven years or 70,000 miles, whichever occurs first:*

•If an emissions-related part listed on pages 22—23 is defective,

the part will be repaired or replaced by Toyota. This is your

LONG-TERM Emission Control System DEFECT WARRANTY.

YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS

AND OBLIGATIONS MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY COVERAGE

Your Warranties in Detail

California Emission Control Warranty

*For 4-cylinder Camry models certified as partial zero-emission vehicles (PZEV),

if any, coverage is 15 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indi-

cated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.

Toyota recommends that you retain all receipts covering maintenance on

your vehicle, but Toyota cannot deny warranty coverage solely for the

lack of receipts or your failure to ensure the performance of all scheduled

maintenance.

You are responsible for presenting your vehicle to a Toyota dealership as

soon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs should be completed in a

reasonable amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.

You should also be aware that Toyota may deny you warranty coverage if

your vehicle or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper main-

tenance or unapproved modifications.

If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and responsi-

bilities, you should contact the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at

(800)331-4331 or the California Air Resources Board, Mobile Source

Control Division, at 9528 Telstar Avenue, P.O. Box 8001, El Monte, CA

91734-8001.

These warranty obligations do not apply to failures or noncompliance

caused by:

•The use of replacement parts not certified in accordance with

aftermarket parts certification regulations.

•The use of replacement parts not equivalent in quality or design to

original equipment parts.

Provisions under the “What Is Not Covered” section of the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty also apply to this warranty.

OWNER’S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES WHAT IS NOT COVERED

Your Warranties in Detail 21

California Emission Control Warranty

The parts listed here are covered for seven years or 70,000 miles from

the vehicle’s in-service date, whichever occurs first.

Air/Fuel Metering System

•Air-fuel ratio sensor on Highlander

•Engine control computer (engine control module)

•Fuel pump on Sienna

•Mass air flow sensor on Tacoma equipped with 2RZ-FE and 3RZ-FE

•Throttle body

Air Induction System

•Intake manifold and intake air surge tank

•Intake manifold gasket on MR2 Spyder

Catalyst System

•Catalytic converter (warm-up three-way catalyst)

•Exhaust center pipe on Avalon, Corolla Matrix 4WD, Highlander

equipped with 1MZ-FE, Tacoma and Tundra equipped with 5VZ-FE

•Exhaust front pipe on Avalon, Camry, Camry Solara, Celica, Corolla,

Corolla Matrix 2WD, ECHO, Highlander equipped with 1MZ-FE, Land

Cruiser, MR2 Spyder, Sequoia, Sienna, Tacoma, Tundra and 4Runner

•Exhaust manifold on Avalon, Camry, Camry Solara, Highlander, Land

Cruiser, MR2 Spyder, RAV4, Sequoia, Sienna, Tundra equipped with

2UZ-FE and 4Runner

•Exhaust manifold gasket on Land Cruiser, Sequoia, Tundra equipped

with 2UZ-FE and 4Runner

•Right exhaust manifold gasket on Sienna and on Avalon, Camry,

Camry Solara and Highlander models equipped with 1MZ-FE

Your Warranties in Detail

California Emission Control Warranty

PARTS LIST: LONG-TERM EMISSION

DEFECT WARRANTY

Evaporative Control System

•Charcoal canister on Highlander, Land Cruiser and 4Runner

•Fuel tank

Ignition System

•Knock sensor on Land Cruiser, MR2 Spyder, Sequoia, Tacoma

equipped with 5VZ-FE, Tundra and 4Runner

You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indi-

cated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.

Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not have

records to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, any failure

or noncompliance caused by lack of maintenance is not covered by this

warranty.

When maintenance and repairs are paid for by you, these services

may be performed by you or by any automotive service provider you

choose. Toyota will not deny a warranty claim simply because you

used a service provider other than a Toyota dealership for mainte-

nance and repairs. However, any failure or non-compliance caused by

improper maintenance or repairs is not covered by this warranty.

MAINTENANCE

Your Warranties in Detail 23

California Emission Control Warranty

To ensure optimum performance and maintain the quality built into

your vehicle’s emission control systems, Toyota recommends the use of

Genuine Toyota Parts when servicing or repairing the systems.

Warranty coverage is not dependentupon the use of any particular

brand of replacement parts and you may elect to use non-Genuine

Toyota Parts for maintenance and repairs. However, use of replace–

ment parts that are not equivalent in quality to Genuine Toyota

Parts may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

If you use replacement parts that have maintenance or replacement

schedules different from those of Genuine Toyota Parts, you must follow

the maintenance and replacement schedules for the parts you are using.

In addition, you should ensure that such parts are warranted by their

manufacturers to be equivalent to Genuine Toyota Parts.

If your vehicle fails a smog-check test, you may make a claim under the

Emission Performance Warranty. To do so, take your vehicle to an autho-

rized Toyota dealership and present a copy of the smog-check test

report. Also, take your maintenance records in case they are needed.

If your claim qualifies for coverage, the dealership will repair your vehi-

cle within 30 days (unless a shorter period is required by law). If your

claim is denied, Toyota will notify you in writing of the reason within

the same period. If we fail to do so, we will repair your vehicle free of

charge. The only exceptions allowed are when you request or agree to

a delay, or a delay is caused by factors beyond the control of Toyota or

the dealership.

For information on how to obtain service under the Emission Defect

Warranty, see page 29, “Obtaining Warranty Service.”

REPLACEMENT PARTS IF YOUR VEHICLE FAILS A SMOG-CHECK TEST

Your Warranties in Detail

California Emission Control Warranty

If a Toyota dealership is unable to complete repairs on your vehicle

within 30 days, you may have the repairs made under Toyota’s

provisions for emergency warranty repairs. See page 29 for details.

If you have questions or concerns about your vehicle’s California emis-

sion warranty coverage, please follow the steps described under “If You

Need Assistance” on pages 4–5. You may also request information from

or report complaints to:

California Air Resources Board

Mobile Source Control Division

9528 Telstar Avenue

P.O. Box 8001

El Monte, CA 91734-8001

(800)242-4450

Vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control System

that are registered and operated in California or any state that

adopts California emission warranty provisions are covered by this

warranty. Currently, Massachusetts and Vermont are the only other

states to which this warranty applies. Vehicles covered by this

warranty are also covered by the Federal Emission Control Warranty

(see page 14).

REPAIR DELAYS IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS

Your Warranties in Detail 25

California Emission Control Warranty

OBTAINING WARRANTY SERVICE ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRE MANUFACTURERS

The tires that come as original equipment on your vehicle are warranted

by their manufacturer and not Toyota. A separate warranty statement for

the tires is in your glove box.

To obtain service for a tire defect, take the tire to an authorized dealer

of the tire manufacturer. (Refer to your local phone directory for dealer

locations.) Your Toyota dealer may also be able to assist you in obtaining

warranty service from the manufacturer.

For additional warranty information or service assistance, contact the

tire manufacturer directly.

Your Warranties in Detail

Tire Limited Warranty

Bridgestone/Firestone

One Bridgestone Park

Nashville, TN 37214

(800)847-3272

Continental General Tire

1800 Continental Blvd.

Charlotte, NC 28273

(800)847-3349

Goodyear Dunlop Tires

North America, Ltd.

P.O. Box 1109

Buffalo, NY 14240

(800)548-4714

Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co.

1144 East Market Street

Akron, OH 44316

(800)321-2136

Michelin/BFGoodrich

P.O. Box 19001

Greenville, SC 29602

(800)847-3435

Toyo Tire (U.S.A.) Corporation

6261 Katella Ave., Ste. 2B

Cypress, CA 90630

(800)442-8696

Yokohama Tire Corporation

601 South Acacia Avenue

Fullerton, CA 92831

(800)722-9888

You are responsible for ensuring that your Toyota is operated and main-

tained according to the instructions in the Owner’s Manual and the

Scheduled Maintenance Guide.

You should keep detailed records of vehicle maintenance, since under

some circumstances they may be required for warranty coverage. These

records should include date of service, mileage at time of service and a

description of service performed and/or parts installed. For your conve-

nience, a maintenance log is included in the Scheduled Maintenance

Guide. If you sell your vehicle, you should give your maintenance records

to the newowner.

Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not have

records to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, damage or

failures caused by lack of proper maintenance are not covered under

warranty.

You may have maintenance performed on your vehicle by any qualified

person or facility. However, Toyota recommends having maintenance

performed by an authorized Toyota dealership.

Toyota dealership technicians are specially trained to maintain and repair

Toyota vehicles. They stay current on the latest service information

through Toyota technical bulletins, service publications and training

courses. Many are also certified through the Toyota Certification

Program, which involves a series of rigorous written examinations. Feel

free to ask any Toyota dealership to show you its technicians’ credentials.

You can be confident you’re getting the best possible service for your

vehicle when you take it to a Toyota dealership. Plus, a Toyota dealer-

ship will always use Genuine Toyota Parts designed specifically for your

vehicle.

GENERAL INFORMATION WHERE TO GO FOR MAINTENANCE

Your Responsibilities 27

Operation and Maintenance

Warranty coverage is not dependent upon the use of any particular

brand of replacement parts. However, Toyota recommends using only

Genuine Toyota Parts when you need to replace a part on your vehicle.

Like all Toyota products, Genuine Toyota Parts are built to the highest

standards of quality, durability and performance. They are also designed

to fit your vehicle’s exact specifications.

Your Toyota dealership maintains an extensive inventory of Genuine

Toyota Parts to meet your vehicle service needs. And because it is linked

electronically to Toyota’s Parts Distribution Centers, the dealership has

quickaccess to any parts it may not have in stock.

Genuine Toyota Parts are covered by their own warranty (see your dealer

fordetails) or the remainder of any applicable New Vehicle Limited

Warranty, whichever is longer. Non–Genuine Toyota Parts, or any

damage or failures resulting from their use, are not covered by

any Toyota warranty.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Your Responsibilities

Operation and Maintenance

In the United States, U.S. Territories

and Canada

To obtain warranty service in the United States, U.S. territories or Canada,

take your vehicle to an authorized Toyota dealership. If your vehicle

cannot be driven, contact your nearest Toyota dealership for towing

assistance. You do not have to pay for towing to the nearest Toyota deal-

ership if your vehicle is inoperable due to failure of a warranted part.

Outside the United States, U.S. Territories

and Canada

If you are using your vehicle outside the United States, U.S. territories

and Canada and need warranty service, contact a local Toyota dealer-

ship. Please note, however, that your vehicle may not be repaired free

of charge because the local Toyota distributor may have no obligation to

provide warranty service for your vehicle, and/or your vehicle may not

comply with local regulatory or environmental requirements.

If your vehicle is inoperable or unsafe to drive and there is no Toyota

dealership reasonably available to make repairs, you may perform the

repairs yourself or have them performed by another automotive service

provider. Toyota will reimburse you for any of the repairs that are cov-

ered by warranty. To receive reimbursement, present to an authorized

Toyota dealership your paid repair invoices and any parts that were

removed from the vehicle. You will be reimbursed for warranted parts

at the manufacturer’s suggested retail price and warranted labor at a

geographically appropriate hourly rate multiplied by Toyota’s recom-

mended time allowance for the repair.

If your vehicle requires emergency repair, Toyota assumes no liability

forsubsequent failures caused by improper repairs or the use of non-

Genuine Toyota Parts unless you have the vehicle properly repaired in a

timely manner. To ensure that warranty coverage remains intact, have

your vehicle inspected by an authorized Toyota dealership as soon as

possible after an emergency repair.

Obtaining Warranty Service

Your Responsibilities 29

BY GEOGRAPHIC REGION EMERGENCY REPAIRS

Notes

Check one: ■■Same owner, name and/or address has changed ■■New owner, purchased vehicle used

■■Same owner, additional driver who should receive product/safety updates

■■Mr. ■■Mrs. ■■Ms. ■■Miss ■■Dr.

Owner Information Change Form

EVV

First name M.I. Last name

Company name

Street address or P.O. Box Apt. or suite number

City State Zip code

Home phone number Work phone number Extension

Vehicle Identification Number (required to process change) Mo. Day Year

–

–– ––

––

Check here if

address below

is for company ■■

This information is obtained solely for the use of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

Toyota occasionally sends special promotional offers to registered owners. Check here if you prefer not to receive these offers. ■■

Effective date of

this information

Social Security Number

(optional; for Toyota customer reference only)

If your name

or address has

changed or you

purchased your

Toyota as a used

vehicle, please

complete and

mail the attached

card, even if your

warranty coverage

has expired. This

will enable Toyota

to contact you

with important

product or safety

updates concern-

ing your vehicle.

If the card is no

longer attached,

please call the

Toyota Customer

Assistance Center at

(800) 331-4331.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value–conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and

quality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants

follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble–free motoring. For

important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete

satisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Toll–free: 1–800–331–4331

CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll–free: 1–888–TOYOTA–8 (1–888–869–6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of

continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may

find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

2003 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

Motor Corporation.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

iii

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited

warranties:

 New vehicle warranty

 Emission control systems warranty

 Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s

Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.

Your responsibility for

maintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-

fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of

these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section

6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-

formation, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Accessories, spare parts and

modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non–genuine spare parts and accessories

for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.

You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-

ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or

replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or

adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non–genuine

Toyota products. Modification with non–genuine Toyota

products could affect its performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-

tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the

modification may not be covered under warranty.

Important Information About Your Toyota

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Spark ignition system of your

Toyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-

ments of the Canadian Interference–Causing Equipment

Standard.

Installation of a mobile

two–way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two–way radio system in

your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as fol-

lows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precau-

tionary measures or special instructions regarding installa-

tion.

 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport

fuel injection system

 SRS airbag system

 Seat belt pretensioner system

 Traction control system (two–wheel drive models)

 Active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models)

 Vehicle stability control system

 Downhill assist control system

(four–wheel drive models)

 Hill–start assist control system

 Rear height control air suspension

 Cruise control system

 Anti–lock brake system

 Electronic throttle control system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your

Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is

scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they

are, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to

have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-

sioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service

shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your

vehicle.

On–pavement and off–road

driving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve-

hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is

designed for off–road use also. In addition, this vehicle

has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than

that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design fea-

ture causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rol-

lover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death

or serious injury. Be sure to read “Off–road vehicle precau-

tions” on page 242 in Section 2 and “Off–road driving pre-

cautions” on page 263 in Section 3.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-

age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to

avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are

used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause

injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are

informed about what you must or must not do in

order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and

others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause

damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning

is ignored. You are informed about what you must or

must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of

damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Important Information About This Manual

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbol

shown above, it means: “Do not...”;

“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this

happen”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Repair Manual Information

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in top

running order is to maintain it properly from

the moment you drive it off the showroom

floor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is

packed with literally everything you need to

know to perform your own maintenance in

virtually every area of your new vehicle.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for 4RUNNER, written in

English, may be purchased as applicable from

any Toyota dealer.

Pub. Name: 2003 4RUNNER Repair Manual

Pub. No.: RM1001U1

RM1001U2

RM1034U

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre

vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat

er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main

tenance is required and clearly explains how to do the

work yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re

placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil

and filter replacement.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Seat Belt Warning

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU  PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

Comfortable

Easy to use

Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

Toyota 2003 4Runner Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation